FK
Uploaded byfa3el khair
96 views

madina. books grammer notes.pdf

The document outlines Arabic grammar rules presented in Madeenah Book One, focusing on vowel markings, types of words (particles, actions, nouns), and specific grammatical properties of nouns. It explains the concept of tanween and the characteristics that define nouns as definite or indefinite. Additionally, it covers interrogative nouns and particles used for questioning and responding in Arabic.

Embed presentation

Download to read offline
1 ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤـ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ Arabic Grammar Rules for Madeenah Book One  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﺛ‬‫ﱠﻼ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ The three vowel markings ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ fathah َ- ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ - ُ hdhamma ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ kasrah ِ- (a) (u) (i) ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ - ْ Sukoon ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺷ‬ - ّ shaddah  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : at-tanween ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ - ً fathataan - (an) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ- dhammataan - (un) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - kasrataan ٍ- (in) When vowel markings are doubled at the end of a word they are called  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). The additional vowel at the end of a word represents a ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ (noon saakinah). The ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ is not written but is only pronounced. e.g. ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ -ٌ ‫ِﺪ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬
2 The Arabic language is made up of  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (words) and these words are of three types they are known as:  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ - Particle / Letter ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ - Action / Verb  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ - Noun  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ - house ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - went , / to go ‫ِﱃ‬‫ﺇ‬ - to ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ : ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ He went to a house : ceSenten The table below shows the properties of an  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ (noun): Examples Translation Properties ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Masculine, feminine ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ، ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Singular, dual, plural  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ،‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ، ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Intellect, non-intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Indefinite, definite ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ is when an ism is indefinite or not specific, it is general i.e., the ism  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‘a book’ this can be any book from the different types of books. ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ ٌ is when an ism is definite or specific, it is not general i.e., the ism  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‘the book’ or  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‘Muhammad’s book’, here the book is a particular book not just any book in general. An ism in the Arabic language can be ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (dual) meaning it shows upon two i.e., the ism ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ means ‘two students’ this is done by adding ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and noon)at the end of an ism.
3 An ism can be ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ possess intellect such as humans, angels and jinns or it can be ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ possess no intellect such as animals, objects, trees e.t.c. The ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (Asl) origin of an ism is that it carries ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ - ‘two dhammas’ (tanween) on the last letter of the word. The tanween generally is also a sign showing that the ism is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite), however there is an exception to this because you will find that Arabic male names such as  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬، ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ accept tanween but they are ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). The tanween is the Arabic indefinite article corresponding to the English ‘a’/ ‘an’.
4  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ (١) ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ is a house This ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ - ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter to bring to attention or alert  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns of indication). ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ noun of indication ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ is pronounced as ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬, but it is written without the first alif. The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as  ‫ﻱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‘opinion’ or  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬ ‘knowledge’. ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬ This is beneficial knowledge
5 The table below shows the properties of the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ( Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ the near  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The masculine  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬ or things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬. ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ -  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Interrogative or Questioning Noun The Interrogative Noun ‘‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬’ is used to ask a question about something that does not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ and it always comes at the beginning of a sentence. When a word comes at the beginning of a sentence it is called in Arabic ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺻ‬. ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ? is this What ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ -  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ، ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ Particle/Letter of interrogation or questioning or also known as the Interrogative Hamzah. The ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ comes at the beginning of the sentence as do all the nouns or particles of questioning. It can be used to ask a question about those possessing intellect as well as the things that do not possess intellect.
6 ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ? this a house Is ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﻭ‬ Is this a boy? ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ - ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter of answer or reply ‫ﻻ‬ -  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﻧ‬ Letter/particle of answer and negation The particle of reply ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ is used to reply to a question with affirmation whereas the particle ‫ﻻ‬ is used to reply to a question with negation. ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ Is this a pen?  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ . Yes this is a pen ‫؟‬ ‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ Is this a shirt?  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻻ‬ ‫؟‬ No, this is a pen. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ – ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of interrogation/questioning This interrogative noun is used to ask a question about those who possess intellect ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ؟‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬ Who is this man? ‫؟‬ - ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺎﻡ‬ ِ Question mark
7 ) ٢ ( ‫ِﻲ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication/pointing ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺬﺍ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ is a mosque that This is a house and ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant or far. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ can be broken down into three parts: ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication ِ‫ﻝ‬ – ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻌ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ The laam is for the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬ -  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are addressing is masculine.
8 The table below shows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬: Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ The far/distant  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The masculine  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is pronounced ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ but is written without the alif. Some of the grammarians say that the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ have three levels ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺛﻼ‬ : ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ – ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ For the near/close ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ For the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﻂ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ For the middle between near and far ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻳ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ The particle of alert/bringing to attention and the laam indicating upon the distant or far will never come together in a noun of indication i.e; ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬-this is wrong ‘‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﺧ‬’.
9 ) ٣ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ - ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ (al) Definite Particle The definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism which is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) and it causes it to become ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite), and it also causes the tanween at the end to be dropped. The definite particle (al) corresponds to the English ‘the’. ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ َِْ . doctor a This is ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﻟ‬ ٌ ِ َ . doctor is sitting The The Arabic alphabet consists of 28 letters. Of these 14 are called Solar Letters ُ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, and the other 14 are called Lunar Letters ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . In the articulation of the Solar Letters the tip or the blade of the tongue is involved in the pronunciation. The tip or the blade of the tongue does not play any part in the articulation of the Lunar Letters, (refer to lesson 3, pg.19 Madinah bk.1). When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Solar Letter the laam of ‘al’ is not pronounced but is written, and the first letter of the ism takes a shaddah – ّ . For example,  ‫ﺲ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (ash-shamsu). When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Lunar Letter the laam of ‘al’ is pronounced and written. For example,  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-qamaru). In the definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al) the ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (a) is known as ِ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ the Connecting Hamzah. If it is not preceded by a word it will be
10 pronounced with the vowel marking َ- (fathah). If it is preceded by a word it is dropped in pronunciation, though remains in writing. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ :  ‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ The student is sitting and the teacher is standing, (wa l-mudarrisu…). ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ is a beneficial sentence ) ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ( , and it is made up of 2 parts known as ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ُ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬َ(al-mubtada wa l-khabar). ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is from the Arabic word ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ meaning the beginning or starting, and from its origin is that it comes at the beginning of the sentence. (2) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ is an ism that is the subject of talk or discussion. (3) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. (4) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) precedes  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the khabar). (5) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
11  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is that which comes after ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin). (2)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ gives information or news about ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬, and by which it completes a benefit with ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. (3)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite). (4)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ The mosque is near. ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
12 (٤)  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) 1 ( is a Letter/Particle that enters upon an ism only. (2)  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ changes the state of the ism to  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ (majroor), meaning the ism takes kasrah/kasrataan on the last letter. (3)  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ can have many meanings and its meaning is not known or complete until it enters upon a sentence. Then its exact meaning is known from the context of the sentence.  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - Particle of Jarr ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ From- ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ On/Above- ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ - In
13  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the house in Muhammad is ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ –  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ Noun of Questioning f or Place  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ is an ism which is used to ask a question about the whereabouts of someone/something. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ? is the book Where ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ِ؟‬‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ It is on the desk/table? ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬-Detached Pronoun (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of ism that is used to indicate upon the  ‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻏ‬ (Absent), or the  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (Addressed), or the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (Speaker). (2) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ you can begin a sentence with it. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - I ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ - It / She ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - He/It ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You
14 (3) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of a ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (4) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). 5) The dhameer ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ and ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ can be used for those who possess intellect and things that do not possess intellect. If they are used for the latter they will have the meaning ‘it’. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ Where is ‘Aaisha? ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ is in the room She ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ Where is the watch? ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ bed is on the It
15 The table below shows the properties of ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (the Detached Pronouns):  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻋ‬ Number  ‫ﺲ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬ Gender ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ Indicates upon ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Detached Pronoun  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Male  ‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Absent ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - It / He ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Female ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Absent ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ - She/It  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﱠﺮ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Male  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Addressed ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Female ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Addressed ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Speaker ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - I/Me
16 ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Prevented from Tanween) is a Term that is used for a particular group of nouns which do not accept tanween and when they are in a state of  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (kasra) they take Fathah. This particular group of nouns further divides up into many categories and from them is the category known in the Arabic language as: ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺄ‬‫ﱠ‬  ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻣ‬ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٍ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺃ‬ Female Names Without Alif This category contains Female Names which do not accept tanween but there is a condition ' ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺷ‬ ' for them not accepting tanween and that is, that the names are made up of more than 3 letters. This category of names is divided up into into 3 types with regards to their femininity.  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ ُ
17 The ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is a letter that is added at the end of an ism and it signifies femininity of a word. The diagram above shows that there are 3 categories of femininity in female names without alif: 1) In wording and meaning - names which are feminine in their wording i.e. they end in taa marboota and in their meaning i.e. they are names which are used for females. 2) In meaning - names which are used for females but not feminine in wording. 3) In wording - names which are feminine in wording but not meaning, they are names which are used for males. The origin of nouns ending with the ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is only to distinguish the feminine from the masculine. And you will mostly find that with the  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺻ‬ (Adjectives) i.e.  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ / ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (Generous, Noble). ُ ِْ ‫ا‬ - Femininity ِ َْ (In)Wording- ‫ي‬ِ !َ ْ#َ $ (In)Meaning- ‫ي‬ِ !َ ْ#َ $ َْ َ ‫و‬ ِ - (In)Meaning and Wording  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬، ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬،ُ ُ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬،‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬ ُ
18  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : The Definition ‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ - ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻱ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ . The Past Verb-that which indicates upon an event/happening taking place in the time which is before the time of speaking/conversation. ‫؟‬ ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ Where is Abbaas? ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﳌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ to the head teacher He went For every action we have a doer or the one who performs the action. In Arabic the doer of the action is called ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-faa’il).  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : The Definition ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the Doer) is an ism which is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ takes dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter and mentioned before it is its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ verb. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Verb/Action ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The Past Verb The Present Verb The Command Verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - He Wrote  ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ - He Writes ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ - (you)Write!
19  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬ Haamid went to the mosque ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ You will find that ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not always apparent after the verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬. That is because in the past-tense verbs for the Male Absent if ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not apparent then the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ (pronoun) ' ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ' (He) will be ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. And this dhameer is known as  ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (The Hidden Dhameer), you will not see it in writing or pronounce it even though it is there. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ Where is Muhammad? ‫ﺝ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺧ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ left from the mosque He
20 The four signs of an ism There are 4 signs by which an ism is known, and you will not find these signs entering upon the verbs or particles/letters, so they are specific to the nouns. These 4 signs can be used to distinguish between the ٌ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns) and the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺃ‬ (verbs) and  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (particles). (1) The first sign is that the ism accepts  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). (2) The second sign is that ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and laam) can enter upon the ism. (3) The third sign is that  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (particles of jarr) can enter upon the ism. (4) The fourth sign is that the ism can take  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah/kasrataan) on the last letter.  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﱠﻰ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ Muhammad prayed in the mosque  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah)  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ٤ (  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - ِ - ٍ  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ – ٌ – ٍ - ً
21 ) ٥ (  ‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ، ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ . ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ (al-idhaafah) is a relationship between two nouns with a hidden particle of jarr, the first noun is called  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf) and the second noun is called ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf ilaih). ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶﺍﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬ . This Particular idhaafah gives benefit by giving  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to make definite) to the mudhaaf or  ‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to narrow down/particularise). Meaning, if the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite) then the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ will become ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬, if the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) then the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ will be particularised or not so general but it will not be ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬
22  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ This is the teacher’s book ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ The Idhafaah construction has a  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ which is omitted/hidden. This  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ gives meaning to the Idhaafah, there are 3 different  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ that an Idhaafah can have, (1) ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (in), ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ (from/part of) and  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬ (ِ‫ﻝ‬) (for/belonging to). At the moment we have only taken one meaning of the Idhaafah the  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ) ِ‫ﻝ‬ ( which has the meaning of, for/belonging to/possession. So when we say ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ it literally means, ‘the book belongs to Muhammad or Muhammad’s book ) ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ( .  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬ (  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺀﺋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ – Always Majroor ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ – Does not accept tanween ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻳ‬ – Does not accept alif laam
23 ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - ) over there ( - ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ is a noun which is used to indicate/point to a place that is distant or far. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ٍ؟‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ Where is Muhammad’s book? ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ over there It is on the table ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬ - (under) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ / ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻇ‬ )  ‫ﻩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ( ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is a noun of place and the ism that follows it is majroor. ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The bag is under the table The particle ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ (O!) is used when we want to call somebody and the person we are calling is the ism which comes after this particle and it is known as ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the one being called). There are 5 types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, we will study 3 for now.  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ - ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ - ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬ O- Particle of calling Abbaas- The one being called
24 ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ١ (  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ :  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬، ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬، The first type is when we call somebody by their name i.e. O Muhammad!, Haamid!, ‘Abbaas!, and so on. ) ٢ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ ،‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺭ‬ ، The second type is when we call somebody and we intend a particular or specific person i.e. O Teacher!, Man!, and so on. ) ٣ (  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬، The third type is when the one being called is mudhaaf i.e. O ‘Abdallaahi!, O Daughter of Khaalid!, and so on. It is important to note that the first and the second types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ end in one dhamma, not tanween. As for the third type then the Mudhaaf will be  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ (take Fathah on the last letter). The words  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ and  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ begin with hamzatu l-wasl. When preceded by a word the kasrah (ِ-) is dropped in pronunciation, i.e. .ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ٍ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
25 ) ٦ (  ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ is an iron This ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ - ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter to bring to attention or alert  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns of indication). ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of Indication ‫ِﻩ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬is pronounced as ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ but it is written without the first alif. The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‘principle’ orٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ‘advice’. ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ - This advice is beneficial. The table below shows the properties of ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬. Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ the near  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the feminine ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular or (non-intelligent plurals)  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
26 The  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ or things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬. -Generally words ending in ‫ﺓ‬ (taa marboota) are regarded as feminine so when we indicate to them we use the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ . However there are exceptions to this, (refer to lesson 4 under ‘types of femininity’). ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺳ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ٌ This is a car and this is a bike. -Body parts that are in pairs are regarded as feminine. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻋ‬ This is an ear and this is an eye -Also words which are particular to females are regarded as feminine. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺧ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻬ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ This is the engineer’s sister and this is the imaam’s daughter. ِ‫ﻝ‬ -  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of Jarr (for, belongs to, ) The particle of jarrِ‫ﻝ‬ enters upon an ism and causes it to take  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah). ِ‫ﻟ‬ ‫ِ؟‬‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻟ‬ ٍ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺳ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬ . Yaasir to belongs This ? is this Whose  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
27  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ belongs to Allaah All Praise Note that the word  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ becomes ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ by just dropping the alif and no laam will need to be added to the word.
28 ) ٧ (  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of Indication ‫ﻭ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ . is a nurse that This a doctor and ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant/far and feminine. ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬can be broken down into three parts: ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication ِ‫ﻝ‬ – ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬ The laam is for the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬ -  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are addressing is masculine.
29 The table below shows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬: Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ The far/distant  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The feminine ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ The singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite. The letter ‫ﻱ‬ in ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is dropped when joined to the laam and kaaf and the laam takes a sukoon ‫ﹾﻚ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬. ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺣﺎ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬
30 Al-I’raab- ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ :  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ : ‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺧ‬ِ‫ﻻ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ . The Definition: The I’raab is: Changing of the endings of the words because of the changing of the active elements entering upon them (the change is) apparent or not-apparent.  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎﻻ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ The cases of the ism  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ُ The origin signs of ‘Iraab  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ Types of ‘Iraab  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ - /-ُ  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ - ً / َ-  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ- / ِ-  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ The above definition for I’raab mentions the ending of words changing what is meant by this is the changing of vowel markings that are on the end or last letter of a word. It also mentions that it is the active elements that enter upon a word that cause the change at the ending of a word, an example of active elements are the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (letters/particles). The active element is called ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-‘aamil) in Arabic and the plural is ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. The definition also mentions that the change of a word can be apparent or not apparent. What is meant by ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ apparent change is when the vowel markings at the end of a word can be pronounced and when the vowel
31 markings at the end of a word cannot be pronounced then the change is‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ not apparent. This part will be explained in more depth later. The table above illustrates types of I’raab and its origin signs.  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a dhammah or dhammataan  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ /  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a fatha or fathataan ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a khasrah or khasrataan ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ Also when an ism is in the state of  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) it is called  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’). When an ism is in the state of  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) it is called  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ mansoob). When an ism is in the state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) it is called  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (majroor). ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ( ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬َ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ َ‫ﺔ‬  ‫ﺴ‬‫ِﺎﻟ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ِ Zayd slaughtered the chicken with the knife.  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬
32 The example above shows the three types of I’raab ,  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ , َ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬, ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (knife) is  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ) ِ‫ﺏ‬ ( . The words which fall into the definition of I’raab as mentioned above are known in Arabic as  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab). ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-binaa) ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-binaa) are words which do not show change in their endings and they are considered by the grammarians to be the opposite of words which take  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab), as mentioned above. The words which fall into this category are called ِ َْ $ (mabni).  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ . Definition of  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabniyy): That which it’s ending doesn’t change because of the active elements entering upon it. The definition explains that words which are  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ their endings do not change because of the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active elements) entering upon them, but rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t change at all. However, these words can grammatically have a place in I’raab but they
33 will be in the position or state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬، ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬، ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ due to their place in the sentence. This point will be elaborated upon later.  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ..... Built upon…… ٌ‫ِﻠﺔ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺃ‬ Examples  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Types of Al-binaa  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ ،‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻫﺬ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ - - ْ ٍ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺣ‬ ، ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻧ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬ - - ُ  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ - - َ  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺆ‬‫ﻫ‬ ،ِ‫ﻝ‬ ،ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - - ِ The table above shows that words which are  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ can fall into four types of endings which do not change due to the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ entering upon them, rather they are fixed or built upon that particular ending. There are four possible endings, ‫َة‬ *ْ+َ ‫آ‬ ،.َ /َْ 0 ،. 1َ 2 ،ٌ ‫ن‬ْ!ُ 4ُ 5 .  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ؟‬ Whose book is this?  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ The above example shows that the word ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ is ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ and we know that the mudhaaf ilaih is always majroor (takes kasrah), however the word
34 ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ (who) is  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ (built upon a sukoon) so the ending will always show a sukoon even though it is in the position or state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) does not affect the ending of a word that is  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabni).
35 ) ٨ (  ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-Badal)-‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬ . This man is a trader. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal) In the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is grammatically known as ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- badal), it used in a sentence in order to give  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺗ‬ (emphasis) and ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ (clarity or explanation) to the word that precedes it. So in the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is giving emphasis and clarity to the word ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬, it is telling us that the one being indicated to is ‘the man’.It can also be understood that the badal is the same the thing as the word which precedes it, i.e. the man is the one being indicated to and the one being indicated to is the man. Another example can be used to explain this, if I had a book in my hand which I was indicating to and I said to my teacher, ‘this is new’ ' ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬ ' . It would be understood that the book is new and if I was to mention the book in my sentence I would say in Arabic, ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬ . By mentioning '  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ' , I have put a ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬ ٌ (extra or additional word in the sentence which is known as ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal). It is important to note
36 here that if I were to say in Arabic, ‘ ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬’ this would not be considered to be a complete or beneficial sentence. To make it a beneficial sentence we must add a  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺧ‬ (khabar), as shown in the example above. The subject of ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ and the types of al-badal will be covered later on inshaallaah. ‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ . The teacher is from America and the student is from England.  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . Hamid went to the hospital.  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺣ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ . Definition: al-ismul-maqsoor, it is an ism mu’rab which has an inseparable or binding alif on its end and the letter before it takes a fatha and all the vowel markings on it are not apparent. The words ِ‫ﺇ‬،‫ﻰ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻣ‬،‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻣ‬،‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ all end with an binding alif or the letter ‫ﻯ‬ which looks like the letter ‫ﻱ‬ (ya) except that it doesn’t have the two dots but it is pronounced as an alif. Also the ismul-maqsoor is  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab) it takes  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab) but the I’raab is  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (taqdeer) not apparent. The examples above illustrate this, the ismul-maqsoor (nouns
37 ending with the binding alif at the end) are preceded by  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ but the change caused by the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ is not apparent, the case of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- jarr) cannot be seen. The Ismul-maqsoor falls into one of the categories or types of words where the I’raab is ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (please refer back to the definition of I’raab).
‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ا‬ ~~ ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ~~ ‘Inna and its likes ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬: :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬ . They make the ism (noun) mansoob (accusative) take a fatha, and make the khabar marfoo’ (nominative take a damma). Indeed/verily Indeed/verily But
:  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ : ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ِﻴﺩ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﺃﻴﻀ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﱠﻭ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺽ‬ . ‘Inna brings about emphasis Anna brings about emphasis also  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ . َ‫ل‬‫ﻗﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹾﺭﻯ‬‫ﺨ‬ُ ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ّ ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ comes at the beginning of a sentence and after qaala and  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ comes after the other verbs. Verily Allah is oft-forgiving I knew that verily Khaalid is ill. Would that…. (Used for seeking something impossible or in which there is difficulty) It is as if …… (for similitude or speculation) I hope…(Used for hope or regret)
 ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻗﺎ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺴ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﻼ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ . Verily Allah is my lord. My mother said verily you are a hard worker. I heard that verily the teacher did not come today. laakina brings about istidraak…. Muhammad is a hard worker but Haamid is lazy.
١ ٢ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﻴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹶﻬﺎ‬‫ﻝ‬ . Conveys speculation Conveys similitude La’alla conveys hope, and its meaning is I hope. Ka’anna has two meanings  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻅ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ . It is as if the masjid is a school.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻝﻴﺎﺒﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ . It is as if you are from Japan. I hope that the teacher is in his room.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ .
‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﱢﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : - seeking of the impossible) ِْ َ ْ ُ ‫ا‬ ُ َ َ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﱠﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : - that in which there is difficulty) ٌ ْ ُ ِ ِ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ . Would that I have a million pounds! Layta brings about hope, and it is seeking the impossible and that in which there is difficulty. Would that youth would return!
~~ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ~~ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ . ‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ )  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺼﺎ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱢﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻻ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ِﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ : }  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ { The different forms ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ Dhu: its meaning is possessor/owner, and it is always mudaaf (possessed) and the noun which is next to it is genitive (majroor), by construction. Allah the most high says (translated meaning): ‘Verily Allah he is the sustainer, the possessor of might and power’ For feminine plural  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For feminine singular ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For masculine plural ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For masculine singular ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬
 ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﱡﻼ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ These students (female pl.) possesses knowledge This student (female sig.) Posseses knowledge These students (male pl.) posses knowledge This student (male sig.) posses knowledge
~~ ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ~~ ) ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ِﻺ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : َ‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺘﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬ ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ `Am is used for questioning (sentence) Are you from India or Pakistan? And ‘Aw is used for non-questioning. (sentence) Take this or that.
‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ 3 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 10 ,  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ٍ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٍ ‫ﺓ‬ . ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ِﻑ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ( ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ ( ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸﻜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . Hundred and thousand Hundred and thousand are similar to the numbers from 3 to 10, (in construction) except that their  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ (enumerated) is singular. A hundred men A thousand women And they are (used) for masculine and feminine (enumerated). And the alif in ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ (hundred) is written but not pronounced.
‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹾﻔﻰ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻻ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ . ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫َﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ . The past tense is negated with ‫ﻤﺎ‬ and the present tense with ‫ﻻ‬ I did not go to the museum. Ahmad did not write the lesson. I am not going to the museum. Ahmad is not writing (up) the lesson. Example
‫ﹾﺒﺎل‬‫ﻘ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ . ) ‫ﺱ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶﺩ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ .  ‫ﺴ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺸﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺄ‬ . ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ . ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ؟‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻬ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ٍ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬ . How much is this book and this magazine? As for the book, then it for ten riyals and as for the magazine then it is for three riyals.  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺘﺎﺒﻲ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻩ‬ The letter of future tense ‫ﺱ‬ The head teacher shall return tomorrow I will go to Mecca inshaa Allah The preposition of explanation ‘As for’ Example Oh brothers where is my book? Have you seen it?
‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻡ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ + ‫ﻩ‬ = َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫؟‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ . When the attached pronoun of nasb occurs after the pronoun of second person, ‫ﻭ‬ is increased between them. ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ - pronoun of second person.  ‫ﻩ‬ - Attached pronoun of nasb. Increase in‫ﻭ‬ Have you seen it? (Plural masc. second person)
‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﹶﺴﺭ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬ . ) ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ( ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺴ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻋﻼ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ .( Students Fem. pl. Cars Fem. pl. Believers Fem. pl. And the sound feminine plural; its sign of nasb (accusative case) is kasra. Allah created the earth and the sun and the moon and the skies. ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ is an object it is in accusative case, and the sign of it being accusative is a kasra. The entering of ‘the hamza of questioning’ on al. Example
‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ = ‫ﺁ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻝ‬ ) ‫ﺃ‬ + ‫ﺍل‬ = ‫ﺁل‬ ( ‫ﺁ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ . Compound numbers When ‘the hamza of questioning’ enters upon al, the hamza of al is made to stretch. Is Bihaar (rivers) the plural of bahr (river)? Did the headmaster come today?
∗ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫َﻴ‬‫ﺌ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜ‬ ‫ﺎل‬ : Eleven ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ↑ ↑ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ∗ ِ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﹶﺘ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ , ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺯ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺍﻝﻔﺘﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . First part Second part Compound numbers are fixed (remain unchanged/undeclined) on fath so the first and second part like the fatha. Compound numbers are made of two parts.
‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 11 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 The numbers from 11 to 19 ∗ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 11 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 99  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻁﺎﻝﺒ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 11 ‫ﻭ‬ 12 The numbers 11 and 12 ∗ 11 ‫ﻭ‬ 12 : ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬ The enumerated, from 11 to 99 is always single, mansoob. 99 students (male) 11 students (male) If the ma’dood is masculine then the first part and the second part are masculine.
‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Twelve Eleven Male students Male students ‫ﻓﻲ‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 3 1 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 The numbers from 11 to 13 ∗ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ 13 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭل‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱠﺎﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻠﻤﻌ‬ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Thirteen Thirteen Female students Male students Masculine Masculine If the enumerated (ma’dood) is masculine, then the first part differs in gender with the enumerated (ma’dood) and the second part agrees with the ma’dood. And the opposite is in the case of the feminine ma’dood.
‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺓ‬‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬ ‫ﺜﻼﺙ‬ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ feminine masculine masculine feminine
‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ . ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ .  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ِ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝﻌﺎ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻷ‬ Because  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻷ‬ = ِ ‫ل‬ +  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ . ‫ﻭ‬ )  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻤﻥ‬ )  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ِِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺩ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻷ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . Hamid returned from school because he is poorly. Ordinal numbers Example The second lesson, to the tenth lesson. The First lesson.  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻷ‬ = laam + anna. And anna is from the sisters of inna. And they are a qualifying noun and an adjective (i.e they act as n’at and man’ut).
ِ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻷ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . I returned from the market because I am poorly.  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ = ‫ِﻤﺎﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ . Why? ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Why?  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ Why did you exit from the school? Why did you beat this boy?
‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ : ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬  ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ Why? Haa of silence ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫؟‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ Why? Did you beat this boy? Yes Why? ‫ﻨﻌﻡ‬ .  ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫؟‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬
 ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻹﺴ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . The student is not poorly. ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ِﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺽ‬ . The student is not poorly. ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ِﺎﻝﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﺈ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ .  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ Laysa brings about negation. It makes the noun marfoo’ and makes the khabar mansoob. Verily it is majroor with baa of zaa’ida (increase) in the place of nasb. And it is made majroor (genitive) with baa of zaa’ida (increase).
‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ) ‫ﺍﺒﻥ‬ ( The omitting of hamza in ibn. ‫ﻫﻤﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ) ‫ﺍﺒﻥ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻅ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ٍ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Example  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . ِ ‫ل‬‫ِﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺍﻝﻬﻤﺯ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﺒ‬ ‫ِﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻷ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . The hamza of ibn is omitted, in writing and pronunciation, when it occurs between two names (and its condition is that the two names are on one line). Haamid son of Ali The hamza is not omitted in the example : ‘Hasan son of the imaam’, because it does not occur between two names.
ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﺴ‬ Comparative and superlatives ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ , ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬ ,  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ .  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻐ‬ ‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ,  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﺼ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ . Ismu tafdeel: it is a diptote, (prevented from changing). It is a description upon the scale of ) ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( af’alu. Haashim is tall, and Haamid is taller then him. Aamina is small, but Zaynab is smaller then her.
ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﻭ‬ ) ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ٌ ‫ل‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻫﺫﺍ‬ , ‫ﻤﺎ‬ َ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻁ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ َ‫ل‬ ! This man is tall, how tall is this man! ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬ , ‫ﻤﺎ‬ َ‫ل‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺠ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺓ‬ ! This car is tall, how tall is this car! ‫ِﻪ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ The Object ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Example It is on the scale of ‘Af’alu. The verb of astonishment/amazement.
‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻻﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻝﻔﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺁ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ The student read the Qur'aan ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻻﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ The laa of prohibition The laa of negation The laa of negation and the laa of prohibition  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ِﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ْ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ Why are you not eating oh my brother? ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ْ‫ل‬ ‫ﺃﺨﻲ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ . Don’t eat this oh my brother. object subject verb
‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻫﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ِﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ , ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬ ,  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ . ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ Are you not going to the playground? ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ . Don’t go to the playground. The difference between ‫ِﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ (laa of negation) and ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬ (the laa of prohibition) is that verily the laa of negation does not have an affect, as for the laa of prohibition then it makes the present verb majzoom (take a
) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ( ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ The maa of connection ) ( : ‫ﻨﻰ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﱠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ) ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺍﻝﺸﻲ‬ .( ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺫﻱ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻲ‬ . ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ْ‫ل‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ : Ponder over the following ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻜﺘﺎ‬ ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ . I do not have a book. ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬َ‫ﺄ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . I will buy that which you want. ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ؟‬ what is this? It means ‘the thing which’ : ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ meaning I am eating the thing which you are
‫ِﻴل‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻻ‬ The laam of motivation/justification ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﻷ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻐ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ َ‫ل‬  ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ Why do you say that ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ . I did not understand the lesson. ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍ‬ what is your name? Haamid left to wash his face.. I left to drink water.
‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( Making the present tense verb accusative with anna ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ُﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ِﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : Making nasb of ‘af’aalul khamsa ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ : ٥ ٤ ٣ ٢ ١  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ . Where do you want to go oh my brother? I want to travel to Mecca. Example You singular. Feminine are going. They dual. masculine are going. They plural. masculine are going. You plural. masculine are going. You dual. masculine are going.
 ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱡﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻋﻼ‬ : ‫ﹾﻫﺒﻭ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﹾﻫﺒﺎ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ . ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻭﻋﻼ‬ : ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾﻫ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ That you pl. go ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ And the alif is not read. ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺹ‬ِ ‫ﻗ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺘﻅ‬ ‫ﹼﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹶﻭ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻯ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ( ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ( That he calls The sign of its raf’ is the noon and the sign of nasb is its ommitence, and the benefit of this alif is that it manifests in the naaqis verb (a naaqis verb is one which its root ends with an alif, waw or yaa). So if it were not for this alif you would not be able to see the difference between them.
 ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻜﺎ‬ )  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻜﺎ‬ (  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺴﻡ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺨﺒ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . Hamid was rich ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺴﻡ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺨﺒ‬  ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . Hamid was studying  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . Kaana makes the noun marfoo (nominative case) and makes the khabar mansoob (accusative case) The information of kaana mansoob. The noun of kaana marfoo’ The noun of kaana, in nominative case. Kaana also brings about continuation The information of kaana in the place of nasb (accusative case).
‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻜﺎ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ِﻴﻤ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬ . Allah is oft forgiving , merciful ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ Does not cease ) ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫َﺨﻭﺍ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ) ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ( ,  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻴﻀ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ِﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫َﺯﺍ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . How are you today oh brother? I was ill yesterday and I do not cease to be ill (meaning I still am ill). ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ . Ahmad does not cease to be a hard worker. ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ is from the sisters of ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ kaana, and it brings about continuation. Example
) ‫ﻙ‬ (  ‫ﻪ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶﺤ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺴﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ . My watch is like your watch.  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺔ‬ . This masjid is like a school. ‫ِﺭ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺍﻝﻜﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ : ‫ﹶﻬﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ . ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺎ‬  ‫ﻲ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ (  ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹶﻥ‬‫ﻝ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ :  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶﺤ‬‫ﻨ‬ : The present tense verb is negated with ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ to give a future tense meaning. Lan makes the present tense verb mansoob and brings about a negation with emphasis. ‫ﻙ‬ is a preposition from the genitive prepositions, it brings about similitude. The kaaf does not enter on the pronouns. Like, : it is said: ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻬﺎ‬ . I am like him or you are like her.
‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ . I will not go to London. ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ . You will never return to the land of the disbelievers. ‫ﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﷲ‬ ‫ﺼﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ ) : ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹾﻴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬  ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ِ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﻪ‬ ( ‫ﺍﻝﺒﺨﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺍﻩ‬ . ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺎ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎﻀﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱡﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﹸﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ and ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ bring about negation in the past tense and they make the present tense verb jussive (take a sukoon) And the sign of the jussive case (jazm) in the af’aalul khamsa (five verbs) is the emitting of the noon and in the af’aalul ‘arb’a (four verbs) a sukoon. ‘The prophet may Allah’s peace and blessings be upon him said : He who wears silk in this life will never wear it in the hereafter’. Narrated bukhari.
‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹾﻫﺒﺎ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻜﺫﻝﻙ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ .( ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ,  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻜﺫﻝﻙ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ .(  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﹶﺭ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻝ‬ =  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ , ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ =  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻵ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ) ‫ﻴﻜﺘﺏ‬ ‫ﺴﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .( And the difference between lam and lamma: lam yaktub = he did not write lammaa yaktub = he has not yet written (and shall write)
‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ The Five Nouns ُ َ ْ َ ‫ا‬ ُ ‫ء‬ ْ !‫ا‬ ‫ﺍﺒ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ ‫ﻤﺎﻝﻙ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻜﺫﻝﻙ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺃ‬ ,  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺹ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻴﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻜﺎﻨ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ِﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﱢﻡ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﺤ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ And they are: in-law mouth possess or brother father Ibn Maalik said: abun, akhun, hamun and like wise hanun, but leaving off the final on is better. (ie, Hanun) When the asmaa al khamsa are in idaafa, (other than being attached to the yaaa of mutakkalam), they decline by the addition of letters.
‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ :  ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﺒ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﺎﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻋ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﻤﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺃﻨ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺄ‬ You are like a father I am a father This is your father’s house. I know your father. I am your father. And if it is not in idaafa (possessor and possessed construction) then it is made to decline with its original signs.
) ‫ﻀﻰ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ( ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬ ) ‫ﻠﻰ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ٌ ‫ل‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹾﻠﻰ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺤﻰ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭﻯ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ )  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻓﺎ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ , ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . Akhtar is a Persian name and it is a diptote (mamnoo’ minas sarf- doesn’t like tanween and kasra). The sign of its kasra is a fatha.) Marda ‫ﻀﻰ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ is on the scale of fa’la ‫ﻠﻰ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ and it is a diptote (mamnoo’ minas sarf- doesn’t like tanween and kasra,) The sign of its kasra is a fatha.) Captive sing. Wounded pl. Wounded sing. Killed pl. Killed sing. Captives pl.
‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻐ‬ The Diminutive ) ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ( ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ٍ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺯﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺜﻼﺜ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ , ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ : ١ ٣ ٢ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ِ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ Fu’ay’eelu Fu’ay’elu Fu’aylu ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ This is a diminutive And the diminutive has three scales, and they are: ٍ ‫ف‬ُ ْ‫أ‬ ِ َ %% ' ‫ن‬ ‫آ‬ That which is (formed from a noun) of three letters. ٍ ‫ف‬ُ ْ‫أ‬ ِ َ )َْ‫ر‬‫أ‬ ' ‫ن‬ ‫آ‬ That which is (formed from a noun) of four letters ٍ ‫ف‬ُ ْ‫أ‬ ِ َ ْ َ + ' ‫ن‬ ‫آ‬ That which is (formed from a noun) of five letters
 ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ) ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺘﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ( Here it is oh teacher!  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺇ‬ ) : ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ( )  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬ ( ) ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ( ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ A small boy A boy ٌ A humble slave A slave ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹾﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ A small key A key ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِﻕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ A small hotel A hotel ‫ﻜﺘﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ A small book A book (note book) ‫ﹶﺒﺭ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ Information The preposition of alarming or making aware. Beginning  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ A small flower A flower
ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻴﻘﻭل‬ : ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ : ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ . ) ‫ﺱ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺸﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ( Sit wherever you wish ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻤﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻅ‬ , ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ )  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺸﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ( ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . The man says: ‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ (here I am) and the woman says: ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬(here I am). ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ is an adverb of place and it is attached to a sentence. And it is said its ‘iraab (declension) ,‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ is fixed on damma in the place of nasb (accusative case) maf’oolun feehi and the sentence  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺸﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ is in the place of jar, mudaafun ilayhee.
) ِ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( By Allah I was about to die! ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ِﺎﻝﻼ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﺴ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺒ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ . ‫ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺯﻴل‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ) ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ..........  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹾﺴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( By the fig and the olive…. Verily, We created man of the best stature (mould), (At-Tin 95:4) ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ِﺎﻝﻼ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻓﻼ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺘﻘﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ .( When the past tense verb occurs as an affirmation with an oath, it is necessary to emphasis it with a laam and qad. As for the past tense verb which comes as an negation with an oath then it is not emphasised with laam and qad. You say  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‘by Allah I did not see him’
) ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ( ) ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ (  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺹ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ) ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺒﺎﻝ‬ ,  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ) ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ‫ﹶﻁﺄ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎﻀﻲ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ) . ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ( ِ ‫ل‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ . ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ When ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ When I entered the house I smelt a pleasant smell. ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ) ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( ‫ﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺎﻀﻲ‬  ‫ﺹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻅ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻜﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤﺎﻀﻴ‬ . ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ is specific for the past tense and ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ for the future. People use ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ with the past tense however this is incorrect. ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ is fixed on the damma in the place of the nasb case, maf’oolun feehi. This is called the lammaa of heeniyyah (lamma of time). It is an adverb (of time) and is specific to the past tense (verb). Its answer is always in the past tense like what is in the example.
 ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺢ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬ , ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹶﻭ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ ) ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹼﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ :  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹼﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ . ‫ﱠﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤﻴ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ : The dual pronoun ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻝﻠﻐﺎ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺄ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﱠﺫ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻓﻴ‬ ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ , ‫ﹶﻴ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻝﻠﻐﺎﺌﺒ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬ , ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝﻠ‬ , ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﻴ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝﻠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . The dual pronoun includes the masculine and feminine. It is used for the dual masculine and feminine third person and dual feminine and masculine second person. It is not correct that it enters upon the present tense (verb), like the speech of people ‘Lamma (when) I eat this food I become ill’ and the correct is: ‘ indamaa (when) I eat this food I become ill.’
‫ِل‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ : The attached nominative pronoun.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ : ‫ﺫﻫﺒ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺤﺎﻤﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ , ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . Haamid and khaalid went, faatima and Aamina went. ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹾﺴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻅ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ َ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻻ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻨ‬ ِ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ , ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻼ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻏ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ , ‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﻭ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ) : ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬ ‫ﺼ‬  ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ .( Alif It is permissible to use the plural wording of things which are connected to a person, and can only be found in the singular forms, when addressing two people. Example: ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬ What are your(two people) names? , ‫ِﻼ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻏ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ wash your (two people) faces, and from it, is his speech the most high: ‘..so indeed your hearts inclined…’ (At-tahreem 66:04)
ٍ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻫﻲ‬ : The adjective follows the qualifying noun (that which is described) in 4 matters. They are: ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ , ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺍﻝﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ِﻴﺙ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺄ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺏ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ In masculinity and femininity In definiteness and indefiniteness In singularity, duality and plurality In declension ٢ ٤ ٣ ١
‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ‫ﻜﻠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺤﻤﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺒﺭ‬ ‫ﻁﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺒﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﷲ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻔﻘﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﻜﺘﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻨﻲ‬ . ‫ﻤﺠﺎﻫﺩ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺨﺕ‬ ‫ﺘﺭﺠﻤﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬

More Related Content

PDF
Handouts for madina book-1
bySonali Jannat
 
PDF
madina _book _handouts.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
Handouts book 1
byShahedur
 
PDF
2 the-nouns-in-arabic
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
PDF
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
byssuser1b2e21
 
DOC
Grammar rules of Madeenah book1
bySonali Jannat
 
PDF
Madina book1-notes
bySonali Jannat
 
PDF
Grammatical terms1
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
Handouts for madina book-1
bySonali Jannat
 
madina _book _handouts.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
Handouts book 1
byShahedur
 
2 the-nouns-in-arabic
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
English we use (the) ) before the definite nouns but in Arabic we useالَ befo...
byssuser1b2e21
 
Grammar rules of Madeenah book1
bySonali Jannat
 
Madina book1-notes
bySonali Jannat
 
Grammatical terms1
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 

Similar to madina. books grammer notes.pdf

PDF
3A+-+Lesson+1.pdf
byEmranSalam
 
PDF
1. Class presentation1.pdf
byssuser5d418d
 
PDF
Arabic level-0-class-6
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
PDF
4 past-tense-verb7
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
PDF
Madinah-book-1-notes
bySonali Jannat
 
PDF
Arabic Nouns
bySonali Jannat
 
PPTX
Arabic Grammar
byMustaqeem Moin
 
PPTX
Revision.pptx
bypioussaleha
 
PPTX
Arabic 1: basics on nouns
byMohamed ZAIM
 
PPTX
Durusul Lughatul Arabia Juz 1 content.pptx
byUkashaMohamed
 
DOC
Madeenah Book-1 (Grammar Rules)
byZaffer Khan
 
PDF
Level 1-class-4.ppt [compatibility mode]
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
DOCX
Glossary of arabic grammar
bySonali Jannat
 
DOCX
Glossary of arabic grammar
bySonali Jannat
 
PDF
A hundred and one rules !
byCaller To Islam / الداعية الإسلامي
 
PPTX
Arabic 3: Basics on the nominal sentence
byMohamed ZAIM
 
PDF
Tasheel alnahw
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
PDF
Arabic level-0-class-8
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
PDF
Nahw course 5
byTariq Aziz
 
PDF
Arabic level-0-class-1
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
3A+-+Lesson+1.pdf
byEmranSalam
 
1. Class presentation1.pdf
byssuser5d418d
 
Arabic level-0-class-6
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
4 past-tense-verb7
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
Madinah-book-1-notes
bySonali Jannat
 
Arabic Nouns
bySonali Jannat
 
Arabic Grammar
byMustaqeem Moin
 
Revision.pptx
bypioussaleha
 
Arabic 1: basics on nouns
byMohamed ZAIM
 
Durusul Lughatul Arabia Juz 1 content.pptx
byUkashaMohamed
 
Madeenah Book-1 (Grammar Rules)
byZaffer Khan
 
Level 1-class-4.ppt [compatibility mode]
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
Glossary of arabic grammar
bySonali Jannat
 
Glossary of arabic grammar
bySonali Jannat
 
A hundred and one rules !
byCaller To Islam / الداعية الإسلامي
 
Arabic 3: Basics on the nominal sentence
byMohamed ZAIM
 
Tasheel alnahw
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
Arabic level-0-class-8
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 
Nahw course 5
byTariq Aziz
 
Arabic level-0-class-1
byM. A. Abu Awwad
 

More from fa3el khair

PDF
لماذا_نعتذر_من_الشدة_الزائدة_ولا_نعتذر_من_اللين_الزائد_؟
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
الأبراج_بين_دوكنز_والمنبهر_بالغرب .
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
. ملامح الإسلام المدني الديموقراطي
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
الرد-على-مختصر-العقائد-الحنبلية للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
الأصول_التي_بنى_أهل_السنة_قولهم في الإيمان للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
حكم تارك التوحيد إلقاء الدكتور أيمن بن سعود العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
نقض-بدعة-التفويض-في-الصفات للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
تجربة النية دراسة عقدية للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
اسبال_الكلام_على_حديث_ابن_عباس_في_القيام_.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
بهجة_قلوب_الابرار_وقرة_عيون_الأخيار_.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
الامام_التابعي_ثابت_البناني_وطبقة_الرواة_عنه.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
زوائد الموطأ أخرجه و حققه عبد السلام بن محمد بن عبد الله بن سعد العامر
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
السيرة النبوية لخير البرية للشيخ عادل الشوربجي
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
شرح_رسالة_ـــ_واجب_العبد_إذا_أمره_الله_بأمر_ـــ
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
كتاب شرح الجامع لعبادة الله وحده للشيخ محمد سعيد رسلان
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
أسرار من حياة فضيلة الشيخ عبد العزيز بن باز
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
ما رواه. النقلة من أخبار الأكلة.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
مصحف_مجمع_ الملك_الفهد_باللون_الأخضر.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
PDF
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_باللون_البرتقالي.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
لماذا_نعتذر_من_الشدة_الزائدة_ولا_نعتذر_من_اللين_الزائد_؟
byfa3el khair
 
الأبراج_بين_دوكنز_والمنبهر_بالغرب .
byfa3el khair
 
. ملامح الإسلام المدني الديموقراطي
byfa3el khair
 
الرد-على-مختصر-العقائد-الحنبلية للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
الأصول_التي_بنى_أهل_السنة_قولهم في الإيمان للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
حكم تارك التوحيد إلقاء الدكتور أيمن بن سعود العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
نقض-بدعة-التفويض-في-الصفات للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
تجربة النية دراسة عقدية للدكتور أيمن العنقري
byfa3el khair
 
اسبال_الكلام_على_حديث_ابن_عباس_في_القيام_.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
بهجة_قلوب_الابرار_وقرة_عيون_الأخيار_.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
الامام_التابعي_ثابت_البناني_وطبقة_الرواة_عنه.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
زوائد الموطأ أخرجه و حققه عبد السلام بن محمد بن عبد الله بن سعد العامر
byfa3el khair
 
السيرة النبوية لخير البرية للشيخ عادل الشوربجي
byfa3el khair
 
شرح_رسالة_ـــ_واجب_العبد_إذا_أمره_الله_بأمر_ـــ
byfa3el khair
 
كتاب شرح الجامع لعبادة الله وحده للشيخ محمد سعيد رسلان
byfa3el khair
 
أسرار من حياة فضيلة الشيخ عبد العزيز بن باز
byfa3el khair
 
ما رواه. النقلة من أخبار الأكلة.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
%D8%A7%D9%84%D9%86%D8%B8%D9%85%20%D8%A7%D9%84%D8%AC%D9%84%D9%8A%20%D9%81%D9%8...
byfa3el khair
 
مصحف_مجمع_ الملك_الفهد_باللون_الأخضر.pdf
byfa3el khair
 
مصحف_مجمع_الملك_الفهد_باللون_البرتقالي.pdf
byfa3el khair
 

Recently uploaded

PDF
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 5 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
PDF
God’s Deliverance in the Day of Trouble: The Wilson Wang Memoir
byIan Goh
 
PDF
THE WILDERNESS-A Return Before Truth Was Divided.pdf
byAdrianus Muganga
 
PDF
عرس قانا الجليل
bySmiling Lungs
 
PPTX
THE JESUS YESHUA NARRATIVE IN THE TALMUD OF JUDAISM
byVidyasaagar1
 
PDF
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 4 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
PDF
Hinduism and the Clash of Civilizations David Frawley.pdf
byCantodaSereia
 
PDF
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 2 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
PDF
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way 1 - Part 1 of 6 - Reflection on themes of th...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
PDF
THE PROMISE-When Truth Returns to the World.pdf
byAdrianus Muganga
 
PDF
Hinduism and Modern World Arise Arjuna David Frawley.pdf
byCantodaSereia
 
PDF
Bhaktamar stotra in English (poem format).pdf
byManikaJain23
 
PDF
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 6 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
PPTX
yoga therapy-Concept of Yoga Body, Disease, and Health.pptx
byKaruna Yoga Vidya Peetham
 
PPTX
Religion Spiritual Catholic Presentation.pptx
byReaMaePasaylo
 
PPT
The Lords Prayer Explained from the Small Catechism.ppt
byEltonFischer2
 
PPTX
yoga therapy - Anxiety & Depression A Yogic Perspective.pptx
byKaruna Yoga Vidya Peetham
 
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 5 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
God’s Deliverance in the Day of Trouble: The Wilson Wang Memoir
byIan Goh
 
THE WILDERNESS-A Return Before Truth Was Divided.pdf
byAdrianus Muganga
 
عرس قانا الجليل
bySmiling Lungs
 
THE JESUS YESHUA NARRATIVE IN THE TALMUD OF JUDAISM
byVidyasaagar1
 
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 4 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
Hinduism and the Clash of Civilizations David Frawley.pdf
byCantodaSereia
 
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 2 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way 1 - Part 1 of 6 - Reflection on themes of th...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
THE PROMISE-When Truth Returns to the World.pdf
byAdrianus Muganga
 
Hinduism and Modern World Arise Arjuna David Frawley.pdf
byCantodaSereia
 
Bhaktamar stotra in English (poem format).pdf
byManikaJain23
 
The Way of St Vincent is Our Way - Part 6 of 6 - Reflection on themes of the ...
byFamvin: the Worldwide Vincentian Family
 
yoga therapy-Concept of Yoga Body, Disease, and Health.pptx
byKaruna Yoga Vidya Peetham
 
Religion Spiritual Catholic Presentation.pptx
byReaMaePasaylo
 
The Lords Prayer Explained from the Small Catechism.ppt
byEltonFischer2
 
yoga therapy - Anxiety & Depression A Yogic Perspective.pptx
byKaruna Yoga Vidya Peetham
 

madina. books grammer notes.pdf

  • 1.
    1 ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤـ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ Arabic Grammar Rules for Madeenah Book One  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﺛ‬‫ﱠﻼ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ The three vowel markings ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ fathah َ- ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ - ُ hdhamma ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ kasrah ِ- (a) (u) (i) ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ - ْ Sukoon ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺷ‬ - ّ shaddah  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : at-tanween ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ - ً fathataan - (an) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ- dhammataan - (un) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - kasrataan ٍ- (in) When vowel markings are doubled at the end of a word they are called  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). The additional vowel at the end of a word represents a ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ (noon saakinah). The ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ is not written but is only pronounced. e.g. ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ -ٌ ‫ِﺪ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬
  • 2.
    2 The Arabic languageis made up of  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (words) and these words are of three types they are known as:  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ - Particle / Letter ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ - Action / Verb  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ - Noun  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ - house ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - went , / to go ‫ِﱃ‬‫ﺇ‬ - to ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ : ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ He went to a house : ceSenten The table below shows the properties of an  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ (noun): Examples Translation Properties ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Masculine, feminine ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ، ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Singular, dual, plural  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ،‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ، ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Intellect, non-intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ، ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ Indefinite, definite ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ is when an ism is indefinite or not specific, it is general i.e., the ism  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‘a book’ this can be any book from the different types of books. ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ ٌ is when an ism is definite or specific, it is not general i.e., the ism  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‘the book’ or  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‘Muhammad’s book’, here the book is a particular book not just any book in general. An ism in the Arabic language can be ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (dual) meaning it shows upon two i.e., the ism ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ means ‘two students’ this is done by adding ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and noon)at the end of an ism.
  • 3.
    3 An ism canbe ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ possess intellect such as humans, angels and jinns or it can be ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ possess no intellect such as animals, objects, trees e.t.c. The ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (Asl) origin of an ism is that it carries ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ - ‘two dhammas’ (tanween) on the last letter of the word. The tanween generally is also a sign showing that the ism is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite), however there is an exception to this because you will find that Arabic male names such as  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬، ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ accept tanween but they are ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). The tanween is the Arabic indefinite article corresponding to the English ‘a’/ ‘an’.
  • 4.
    4  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ (١) ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ is a house This ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ - ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter to bring to attention or alert  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns of indication). ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ noun of indication ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ is pronounced as ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬, but it is written without the first alif. The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as  ‫ﻱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‘opinion’ or  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬ ‘knowledge’. ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬ This is beneficial knowledge
  • 5.
    5 The table belowshows the properties of the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ( Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ the near  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The masculine  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬ or things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬. ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ -  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Interrogative or Questioning Noun The Interrogative Noun ‘‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬’ is used to ask a question about something that does not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ and it always comes at the beginning of a sentence. When a word comes at the beginning of a sentence it is called in Arabic ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺻ‬. ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ? is this What ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ -  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ، ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ Particle/Letter of interrogation or questioning or also known as the Interrogative Hamzah. The ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ comes at the beginning of the sentence as do all the nouns or particles of questioning. It can be used to ask a question about those possessing intellect as well as the things that do not possess intellect.
  • 6.
    6 ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ? this a house Is ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﻭ‬ Isthis a boy? ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ - ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter of answer or reply ‫ﻻ‬ -  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ٍ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﻧ‬ Letter/particle of answer and negation The particle of reply ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ is used to reply to a question with affirmation whereas the particle ‫ﻻ‬ is used to reply to a question with negation. ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ Is this a pen?  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ . Yes this is a pen ‫؟‬ ‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ Is this a shirt?  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬،‫ﻻ‬ ‫؟‬ No, this is a pen. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ – ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of interrogation/questioning This interrogative noun is used to ask a question about those who possess intellect ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ؟‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬ Who is this man? ‫؟‬ - ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺎﻡ‬ ِ Question mark
  • 7.
    7 ) ٢ ( ‫ِﻲ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Nounof indication/pointing ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺬﺍ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻣ‬ is a mosque that This is a house and ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant or far. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ can be broken down into three parts: ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication ِ‫ﻝ‬ – ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻌ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ The laam is for the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬ -  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are addressing is masculine.
  • 8.
    8 The table belowshows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬: Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ The far/distant  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The masculine  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite. ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ is pronounced ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ but is written without the alif. Some of the grammarians say that the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ have three levels ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺛﻼ‬ : ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ – ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ For the near/close ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ For the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ - ِ‫ﻂ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ For the middle between near and far ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻳ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻻ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ The particle of alert/bringing to attention and the laam indicating upon the distant or far will never come together in a noun of indication i.e; ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬-this is wrong ‘‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﺧ‬’.
  • 9.
    9 ) ٣ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ - ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ (al)Definite Particle The definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism which is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) and it causes it to become ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite), and it also causes the tanween at the end to be dropped. The definite particle (al) corresponds to the English ‘the’. ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ َِْ . doctor a This is ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﻟ‬ ٌ ِ َ . doctor is sitting The The Arabic alphabet consists of 28 letters. Of these 14 are called Solar Letters ُ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, and the other 14 are called Lunar Letters ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . In the articulation of the Solar Letters the tip or the blade of the tongue is involved in the pronunciation. The tip or the blade of the tongue does not play any part in the articulation of the Lunar Letters, (refer to lesson 3, pg.19 Madinah bk.1). When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Solar Letter the laam of ‘al’ is not pronounced but is written, and the first letter of the ism takes a shaddah – ّ . For example,  ‫ﺲ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (ash-shamsu). When ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is prefixed to an ism beginning with a Lunar Letter the laam of ‘al’ is pronounced and written. For example,  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-qamaru). In the definite particle ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al) the ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (a) is known as ِ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻫ‬ the Connecting Hamzah. If it is not preceded by a word it will be
  • 10.
    10 pronounced with thevowel marking َ- (fathah). If it is preceded by a word it is dropped in pronunciation, though remains in writing. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ :  ‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ The student is sitting and the teacher is standing, (wa l-mudarrisu…). ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ is a beneficial sentence ) ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ( , and it is made up of 2 parts known as ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ُ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬َ(al-mubtada wa l-khabar). ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is from the Arabic word ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ meaning the beginning or starting, and from its origin is that it comes at the beginning of the sentence. (2) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ is an ism that is the subject of talk or discussion. (3) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. (4) ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) precedes  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the khabar). (5) ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ
  • 11.
    11  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ isthat which comes after ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin). (2)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ gives information or news about ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬, and by which it completes a benefit with ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. (3)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ in its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺃ‬ (origin) is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite). (4)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’) meaning it takes a dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter of the ism. ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ُﺍ‬‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ The mosque is near. ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬
  • 12.
    12 (٤)  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) 1 (is a Letter/Particle that enters upon an ism only. (2)  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ changes the state of the ism to  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ (majroor), meaning the ism takes kasrah/kasrataan on the last letter. (3)  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ can have many meanings and its meaning is not known or complete until it enters upon a sentence. Then its exact meaning is known from the context of the sentence.  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - Particle of Jarr ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ From- ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ On/Above- ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ - In
  • 13.
    13  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the house in Muhammad is ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ –  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ Noun of Questioning f or Place  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ is an ism which is used to ask a question about the whereabouts of someone/something. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ? is the book Where ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ِ؟‬‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ It is on the desk/table? ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬-Detached Pronoun (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is a type of ism that is used to indicate upon the  ‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻏ‬ (Absent), or the  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (Addressed), or the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (Speaker). (2) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ you can begin a sentence with it. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - I ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ - It / She ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - He/It ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You
  • 14.
    14 (3) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ isa type of a ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (4) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). 5) The dhameer ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ and ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ can be used for those who possess intellect and things that do not possess intellect. If they are used for the latter they will have the meaning ‘it’. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ Where is ‘Aaisha? ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ is in the room She ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ُ؟‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ Where is the watch? ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ bed is on the It
  • 15.
    15 The table belowshows the properties of ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (the Detached Pronouns):  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻋ‬ Number  ‫ﺲ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬ Gender ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ Indicates upon ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Detached Pronoun  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Male  ‫ﺏ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Absent ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - It / He ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Female ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Absent ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ - She/It  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﱠﺮ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Male  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Addressed ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Female ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Addressed ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - You  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (1)  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Speaker ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ - I/Me
  • 16.
    16 ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬(Prevented from Tanween) is a Term that is used for a particular group of nouns which do not accept tanween and when they are in a state of  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (kasra) they take Fathah. This particular group of nouns further divides up into many categories and from them is the category known in the Arabic language as: ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺄ‬‫ﱠ‬  ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻣ‬ُ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٍ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺃ‬ Female Names Without Alif This category contains Female Names which do not accept tanween but there is a condition ' ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺷ‬ ' for them not accepting tanween and that is, that the names are made up of more than 3 letters. This category of names is divided up into into 3 types with regards to their femininity.  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ ُ
  • 17.
    17 The ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (RoundTaa) is a letter that is added at the end of an ism and it signifies femininity of a word. The diagram above shows that there are 3 categories of femininity in female names without alif: 1) In wording and meaning - names which are feminine in their wording i.e. they end in taa marboota and in their meaning i.e. they are names which are used for females. 2) In meaning - names which are used for females but not feminine in wording. 3) In wording - names which are feminine in wording but not meaning, they are names which are used for males. The origin of nouns ending with the ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻃ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (Round Taa) is only to distinguish the feminine from the masculine. And you will mostly find that with the  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ‫ﺻ‬ (Adjectives) i.e.  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ / ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ (Generous, Noble). ُ ِْ ‫ا‬ - Femininity ِ َْ (In)Wording- ‫ي‬ِ !َ ْ#َ $ (In)Meaning- ‫ي‬ِ !َ ْ#َ $ َْ َ ‫و‬ ِ - (In)Meaning and Wording  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬، ‫ﻢ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻃ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬،ُ ُ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬،‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺰ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺣ‬ ُ
  • 18.
    18  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : The Definition ‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ - ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻱ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺰ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﻭ‬ ٍ‫ﺙ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ . The Past Verb-that which indicates upon an event/happening taking place in the time which is before the time of speaking/conversation. ‫؟‬ ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ Where is Abbaas? ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﳌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺇﱃ‬ to the head teacher He went For every action we have a doer or the one who performs the action. In Arabic the doer of the action is called ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-faa’il).  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : The Definition ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻛ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the Doer) is an ism which is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ takes dhammah or dhammataan on the last letter and mentioned before it is its ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ verb. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ - The Verb/Action ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺿ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The Past Verb The Present Verb The Command Verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - He Wrote  ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ - He Writes ‫ﺐ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ - (you)Write!
  • 19.
    19  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬ Haamidwent to the mosque ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ You will find that ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not always apparent after the verb ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬. That is because in the past-tense verbs for the Male Absent if ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ is not apparent then the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ (pronoun) ' ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ' (He) will be ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. And this dhameer is known as  ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (The Hidden Dhameer), you will not see it in writing or pronounce it even though it is there. ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ Where is Muhammad? ‫ﺝ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺧ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ left from the mosque He
  • 20.
    20 The four signsof an ism There are 4 signs by which an ism is known, and you will not find these signs entering upon the verbs or particles/letters, so they are specific to the nouns. These 4 signs can be used to distinguish between the ٌ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns) and the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺃ‬ (verbs) and  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (particles). (1) The first sign is that the ism accepts  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (tanween). (2) The second sign is that ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (alif and laam) can enter upon the ism. (3) The third sign is that  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (particles of jarr) can enter upon the ism. (4) The fourth sign is that the ism can take  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah/kasrataan) on the last letter.  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﱠﻰ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ Muhammad prayed in the mosque  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah)  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ٤ (  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ - ِ - ٍ  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺗ‬ – ٌ – ٍ - ً
  • 21.
    21 ) ٥ (  ‫ﺲ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ، ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻰ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻧ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ . ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ (al-idhaafah) is a relationship between two nouns with a hidden particle of jarr, the first noun is called  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf) and the second noun is called ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mudhaaf ilaih). ُ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶﺍﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬ . This Particular idhaafah gives benefit by giving  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to make definite) to the mudhaaf or  ‫ﺺ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺗ‬ (to narrow down/particularise). Meaning, if the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ is ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite) then the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ will become ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬, if the ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ is ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ (indefinite) then the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ will be particularised or not so general but it will not be ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ (definite). ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺿ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﺇﻟﻴ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬
  • 22.
    22  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ Thisis the teacher’s book ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ The Idhafaah construction has a  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ which is omitted/hidden. This  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ gives meaning to the Idhaafah, there are 3 different  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ that an Idhaafah can have, (1) ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (in), ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ (from/part of) and  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬ (ِ‫ﻝ‬) (for/belonging to). At the moment we have only taken one meaning of the Idhaafah the  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻟﻼ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ) ِ‫ﻝ‬ ( which has the meaning of, for/belonging to/possession. So when we say ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ it literally means, ‘the book belongs to Muhammad or Muhammad’s book ) ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ( .  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﺍﻟﻼﻡ‬ (  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﺀﺋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ – Always Majroor ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻮ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ – Does not accept tanween ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻳ‬ – Does not accept alif laam
  • 23.
    23 ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ - ) over there ( - ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ is a noun which is used to indicate/point to a place that is distant or far. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ٍ؟‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ Where is Muhammad’s book? ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ over there It is on the table ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬ - (under) ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ / ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻇ‬ )  ‫ﻩ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻳ‬ ( ِ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is a noun of place and the ism that follows it is majroor. ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The bag is under the table The particle ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ (O!) is used when we want to call somebody and the person we are calling is the ism which comes after this particle and it is known as ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (the one being called). There are 5 types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬, we will study 3 for now.  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ - ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ - ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬ O- Particle of calling Abbaas- The one being called
  • 24.
    24 ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ١ (  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ :  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬، ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬، The firsttype is when we call somebody by their name i.e. O Muhammad!, Haamid!, ‘Abbaas!, and so on. ) ٢ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ ،‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺭ‬ ، The second type is when we call somebody and we intend a particular or specific person i.e. O Teacher!, Man!, and so on. ) ٣ (  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ ٍ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺧ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬، The third type is when the one being called is mudhaaf i.e. O ‘Abdallaahi!, O Daughter of Khaalid!, and so on. It is important to note that the first and the second types of ‫ﻯ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ end in one dhamma, not tanween. As for the third type then the Mudhaaf will be  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ (take Fathah on the last letter). The words  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ and  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ begin with hamzatu l-wasl. When preceded by a word the kasrah (ِ-) is dropped in pronunciation, i.e. .ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻃ‬ ٍ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬ ،  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺑ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬
  • 25.
    25 ) ٦ (  ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ is aniron This ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ - ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Letter to bring to attention or alert  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ِﻠ‬‫ﻟ‬ is a letter that is used to alert or to bring to attention the person who is being addressed and it is mostly connected to ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ (nouns of indication). ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of Indication ‫ِﻩ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬is pronounced as ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻫ‬ but it is written without the first alif. The ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ is used to point or indicate to people, animals, objects things which can be felt or touched and can also indicate to things that have meaning such as ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‘principle’ orٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ‘advice’. ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻧ‬ ٌ - This advice is beneficial. The table below shows the properties of ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬. Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ the near  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ the feminine ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ the singular or (non-intelligent plurals)  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬
  • 26.
    26 The  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ is‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ (definite). It can be used to indicate or point to those possessing intellect ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ or things that do not possess intellect ٍ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻗ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬. -Generally words ending in ‫ﺓ‬ (taa marboota) are regarded as feminine so when we indicate to them we use the  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ . However there are exceptions to this, (refer to lesson 4 under ‘types of femininity’). ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺳ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ٌ This is a car and this is a bike. -Body parts that are in pairs are regarded as feminine. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﻋ‬ This is an ear and this is an eye -Also words which are particular to females are regarded as feminine. ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﺧ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ِ‫ﺱ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻬ‬  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ This is the engineer’s sister and this is the imaam’s daughter. ِ‫ﻝ‬ -  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of Jarr (for, belongs to, ) The particle of jarrِ‫ﻝ‬ enters upon an ism and causes it to take  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (kasrah). ِ‫ﻟ‬ ‫ِ؟‬‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻤ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ِ‫ﻟ‬ ٍ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺳ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬ . Yaasir to belongs This ? is this Whose  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬
  • 27.
    27  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ belongs to Allaah AllPraise Note that the word  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ becomes ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ by just dropping the alif and no laam will need to be added to the word.
  • 28.
    28 ) ٧ (  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Nounof Indication ‫ﻭ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻃ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ . is a nurse that This a doctor and ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is a noun of indication it is used to indicate/point to objects or people that are distant/far and feminine. ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬can be broken down into three parts: ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ - ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺷﺎ‬‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﺍ‬ Noun of indication ِ‫ﻝ‬ – ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﻟﻼ‬‫ﺍ‬ The laam is for the far/distant ‫ﻙ‬ -  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻄ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ Particle of address Some of the grammarians say that the ‘‫ﻙ‬’ particle of address also indicates upon far/distant and the ‘ِ‫ﻝ‬’ shows upon even more or increased furtherness/distance. The letter/particle of address ‘‫ﻙ‬’ is used if the person or object we are addressing is masculine.
  • 29.
    29 The table belowshows the properties of ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬: Indicates,points to ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ The far/distant  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ The feminine ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬ ‫ﻧ‬‫ﺆ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ The singular  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ All the ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ nouns of indication are ٌ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻣ‬ definite. The letter ‫ﻱ‬ in ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬ is dropped when joined to the laam and kaaf and the laam takes a sukoon ‫ﹾﻚ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬. ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬ ِ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺷ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻚ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺣﺎ‬ ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ُ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻚ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬
  • 30.
    30 Al-I’raab- ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ :  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ : ‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬ ِ‫ﻑ‬‫ِﻼ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺧ‬ِ‫ﻻ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻴ‬ ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ . The Definition: The I’raab is: Changing of the endings of the words because of the changing of the active elements entering upon them (the change is) apparent or not-apparent.  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎﻻ‬‫ﺣ‬ ِ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ The cases of the ism  ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﻼ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺻ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ُ The origin signs of ‘Iraab  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ Types of ‘Iraab  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٌ - /-ُ  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ - ً / َ-  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ- / ِ-  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ The above definition for I’raab mentions the ending of words changing what is meant by this is the changing of vowel markings that are on the end or last letter of a word. It also mentions that it is the active elements that enter upon a word that cause the change at the ending of a word, an example of active elements are the  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ (letters/particles). The active element is called ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-‘aamil) in Arabic and the plural is ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬. The definition also mentions that the change of a word can be apparent or not apparent. What is meant by ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻈ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ apparent change is when the vowel markings at the end of a word can be pronounced and when the vowel
  • 31.
    31 markings at theend of a word cannot be pronounced then the change is‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ not apparent. This part will be explained in more depth later. The table above illustrates types of I’raab and its origin signs.  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a dhammah or dhammataan  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ /  ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a fatha or fathataan ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ‫ﹰ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) is when the end or last letter of a word takes a khasrah or khasrataan ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ / ٍ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ Also when an ism is in the state of  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (ar-raf’u) it is called  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ (marfoo’). When an ism is in the state of  ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (an-nasbu) it is called  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ mansoob). When an ism is in the state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-jarru) it is called  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ (majroor). ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ( ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬َ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ َ‫ﺔ‬  ‫ﺴ‬‫ِﺎﻟ‬‫ﺑ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ِ Zayd slaughtered the chicken with the knife.  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻋ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬
  • 32.
    32 The example aboveshows the three types of I’raab ,  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺯ‬ is  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ , َ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the ٍ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ (past tense verb) ‫ﺢ‬‫ﺑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬, ِ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (knife) is  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) which is causing it to be  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﻣ‬ is the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺣ‬ ) ِ‫ﺏ‬ ( . The words which fall into the definition of I’raab as mentioned above are known in Arabic as  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab). ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-binaa) ُ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-binaa) are words which do not show change in their endings and they are considered by the grammarians to be the opposite of words which take  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab), as mentioned above. The words which fall into this category are called ِ َْ $ (mabni).  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺗ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ : ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻳ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬ ِ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ‫ﺑ‬ ِ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ . Definition of  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabniyy): That which it’s ending doesn’t change because of the active elements entering upon it. The definition explains that words which are  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ their endings do not change because of the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active elements) entering upon them, but rather they are built upon one ending which doesn’t change at all. However, these words can grammatically have a place in I’raab but they
  • 33.
    33 will be inthe position or state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬، ‫ﺐ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬، ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ due to their place in the sentence. This point will be elaborated upon later.  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ..... Built upon…… ٌ‫ِﻠﺔ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﺃ‬ Examples  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ Types of Al-binaa  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻓ‬ ،‫ﻢ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﻧ‬ ،‫ﹾ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻫﺬ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ - - ْ ٍ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺚ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺣ‬ ، ‫ﻦ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﻧ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺿ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬ - - ُ  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ،‫ﻦ‬‫ﻳ‬‫ﺃ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ - - َ  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ ِ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺆ‬‫ﻫ‬ ،ِ‫ﻝ‬ ،ِ‫ﺖ‬‫ﻧ‬‫ﺃ‬ ،ِ‫ﻩ‬ِ‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ٌ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻛ‬ - - ِ The table above shows that words which are  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ can fall into four types of endings which do not change due to the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﻋ‬ entering upon them, rather they are fixed or built upon that particular ending. There are four possible endings, ‫َة‬ *ْ+َ ‫آ‬ ،.َ /َْ 0 ،. 1َ 2 ،ٌ ‫ن‬ْ!ُ 4ُ 5 .  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ : ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ؟‬ Whose book is this?  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ The above example shows that the word ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ is ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ and we know that the mudhaaf ilaih is always majroor (takes kasrah), however the word
  • 34.
    34 ‫ﻦ‬‫ﻣ‬ (who) is ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ ٍ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺳ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬ (built upon a sukoon) so the ending will always show a sukoon even though it is in the position or state of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- jarr) due to its place in the sentence. So the ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻋ‬ (active element) does not affect the ending of a word that is  ‫ﻲ‬ِ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﻣ‬ (mabni).
  • 35.
    35 ) ٨ (  ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ (al-Badal)-‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺃ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬  ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺟ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺗ‬ . This manis a trader. ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal) In the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is grammatically known as ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- badal), it used in a sentence in order to give  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻛ‬‫ﻮ‬‫ﺗ‬ (emphasis) and ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺑ‬ (clarity or explanation) to the word that precedes it. So in the above example the ism ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﺟ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ is giving emphasis and clarity to the word ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬, it is telling us that the one being indicated to is ‘the man’.It can also be understood that the badal is the same the thing as the word which precedes it, i.e. the man is the one being indicated to and the one being indicated to is the man. Another example can be used to explain this, if I had a book in my hand which I was indicating to and I said to my teacher, ‘this is new’ ' ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬ ' . It would be understood that the book is new and if I was to mention the book in my sentence I would say in Arabic, ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﺟ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬ . By mentioning '  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ' , I have put a ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬ ٌ (extra or additional word in the sentence which is known as ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-badal). It is important to note
  • 36.
    36 here that ifI were to say in Arabic, ‘ ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺬ‬‫ﻫ‬’ this would not be considered to be a complete or beneficial sentence. To make it a beneficial sentence we must add a  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﺧ‬ (khabar), as shown in the example above. The subject of ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺪ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ and the types of al-badal will be covered later on inshaallaah. ‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻦ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﺐ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻄ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ . The teacher is from America and the student is from England.  ‫ﺪ‬ِ‫ﻣ‬‫ﺎ‬‫ﺣ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻟ‬ِ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﺐ‬‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬ . Hamid went to the hospital.  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬  ‫ﻒ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻟ‬ : ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻣ‬ِ‫ﺯ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻒ‬ِ‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ِ‫ﺧ‬‫ﺁ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻢ‬‫ﺳ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٌ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺣ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻣ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬ ‫ﺗ‬ ِ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻛ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺟ‬ ِ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ . Definition: al-ismul-maqsoor, it is an ism mu’rab which has an inseparable or binding alif on its end and the letter before it takes a fatha and all the vowel markings on it are not apparent. The words ِ‫ﺇ‬،‫ﻰ‬‫ﺳ‬‫ﻮ‬ ‫ﻣ‬،‫ﹶﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻣ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﻰ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻣ‬،‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﻧ‬ all end with an binding alif or the letter ‫ﻯ‬ which looks like the letter ‫ﻱ‬ (ya) except that it doesn’t have the two dots but it is pronounced as an alif. Also the ismul-maqsoor is  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻣ‬ (mu’rab) it takes  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻋ‬ِ‫ﻹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al-I’raab) but the I’raab is  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (taqdeer) not apparent. The examples above illustrate this, the ismul-maqsoor (nouns
  • 37.
    37 ending with thebinding alif at the end) are preceded by  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ but the change caused by the  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‬ is not apparent, the case of  ‫ﺮ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻟ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺍ‬ (al- jarr) cannot be seen. The Ismul-maqsoor falls into one of the categories or types of words where the I’raab is ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺮ‬‫ﻳ‬ِ‫ﺪ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺗ‬ (please refer back to the definition of I’raab).
  • 38.
    ‫ا‬ ‫ن‬ ‫ا‬‫ا‬ ~~ ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ~~ ‘Inna and its likes ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬: :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬ . They make the ism (noun) mansoob (accusative) take a fatha, and make the khabar marfoo’ (nominative take a damma). Indeed/verily Indeed/verily But
  • 39.
    :  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ : ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ِﻴﺩ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﺃﻴﻀ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﱠﻭ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺽ‬ . ‘Inna brings about emphasis Anna brings about emphasis also  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ . َ‫ل‬‫ﻗﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹾﺭﻯ‬‫ﺨ‬ُ ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬ّ ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ comes at the beginning of a sentence and after qaala and  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ comes after the other verbs. Verily Allah is oft-forgiving I knew that verily Khaalid is ill. Would that…. (Used for seeking something impossible or in which there is difficulty) It is as if …… (for similitude or speculation) I hope…(Used for hope or regret)
  • 40.
     ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻗﺎ‬ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻙ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺴ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﻼ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ . Verily Allah is my lord. My mother said verily you are a hard worker. I heard that verily the teacher did not come today. laakina brings about istidraak…. Muhammad is a hard worker but Haamid is lazy.
  • 41.
    ١ ٢ ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻲ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﻴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶﻬﺎ‬‫ﻝ‬ . Conveys speculation Conveys similitude La’alla conveys hope, and its meaning is I hope. Ka’anna has two meanings  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻅ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ . It is as if the masjid is a school.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ :  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻝﻴﺎﺒﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ . It is as if you are from Japan. I hope that the teacher is in his room.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ .
  • 42.
    ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﱢﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : - seeking of the impossible) ِْ َ ْ ُ ‫ا‬ ُ َ َ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﱠﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : - that in which there is difficulty) ٌ ْ ُ ِ ِ ( ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻬ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ . Would that I have a million pounds! Layta brings about hope, and it is seeking the impossible and that in which there is difficulty. Would that youth would return!
  • 43.
    ~~ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ~~ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ . ‫ﻨﺎﻫﺎ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ )  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺼﺎ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱢﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ِﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ : }  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ َ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ { The different forms ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ Dhu: its meaning is possessor/owner, and it is always mudaaf (possessed) and the noun which is next to it is genitive (majroor), by construction. Allah the most high says (translated meaning): ‘Verily Allah he is the sustainer, the possessor of might and power’ For feminine plural  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For feminine singular ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For masculine plural ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ For masculine singular ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬
  • 44.
     ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﱡﻼ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ِ ‫ﻩ‬ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ُﻻ‬ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ ٍ ‫ﻡ‬ These students (female pl.) possesses knowledge This student (female sig.) Posseses knowledge These students (male pl.) posses knowledge This student (male sig.) posses knowledge
  • 45.
    ~~ ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ~~ ) ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ِﻺ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : َ‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻡ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺘﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﹶﺍ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬ ‫َﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ `Am is used for questioning (sentence) Are you from India or Pakistan? And ‘Aw is used for non-questioning. (sentence) Take this or that.
  • 46.
    ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ 3 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 10 ,  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬َ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ٍ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻝ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍ‬ ٍ ‫ﺓ‬ . ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ِﻑ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ( ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ ( ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸﻜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . Hundred and thousand Hundred and thousand are similar to the numbers from 3 to 10, (in construction) except that their  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ (enumerated) is singular. A hundred men A thousand women And they are (used) for masculine and feminine (enumerated). And the alif in ‫ﻤﺎﺌﺔ‬ (hundred) is written but not pronounced.
  • 47.
    ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹾﻔﻰ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻻ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ . ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫َﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ . The past tense is negated with ‫ﻤﺎ‬ and the present tense with ‫ﻻ‬ I did not go to the museum. Ahmad did not write the lesson. I am not going to the museum. Ahmad is not writing (up) the lesson. Example
  • 48.
    ‫ﹾﺒﺎل‬‫ﻘ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ . ) ‫ﺱ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﹶﺩ‬‫ﻏ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻊ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ .  ‫ﺴ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺸﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬َ‫ﺄ‬ . ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ . ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ؟‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ِﺘﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻬ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ٍ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﻴﺎﻻ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬ . How much is this book and this magazine? As for the book, then it for ten riyals and as for the magazine then it is for three riyals.  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﺘﺎﺒﻲ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻩ‬ The letter of future tense ‫ﺱ‬ The head teacher shall return tomorrow I will go to Mecca inshaa Allah The preposition of explanation ‘As for’ Example Oh brothers where is my book? Have you seen it?
  • 49.
    ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻡ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ + ‫ﻩ‬ = َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫؟‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ . When the attached pronoun of nasb occurs after the pronoun of second person, ‫ﻭ‬ is increased between them. ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ - pronoun of second person.  ‫ﻩ‬ - Attached pronoun of nasb. Increase in‫ﻭ‬ Have you seen it? (Plural masc. second person)
  • 50.
    ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﹶﺴﺭ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻼ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ِ ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬ . ) ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ( ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺴ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻋﻼ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ .( Students Fem. pl. Cars Fem. pl. Believers Fem. pl. And the sound feminine plural; its sign of nasb (accusative case) is kasra. Allah created the earth and the sun and the moon and the skies. ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤﺎﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ is an object it is in accusative case, and the sign of it being accusative is a kasra. The entering of ‘the hamza of questioning’ on al. Example
  • 51.
    ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ ( ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ) ‫ﺍل‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ = ‫ﺁ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻝ‬ ) ‫ﺃ‬ + ‫ﺍل‬ = ‫ﺁل‬ ( ‫ﺁ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺠﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ . Compound numbers When ‘the hamza of questioning’ enters upon al, the hamza of al is made to stretch. Is Bihaar (rivers) the plural of bahr (river)? Did the headmaster come today?
  • 52.
    ∗ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫َﻴ‬‫ﺌ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜ‬ ‫ﺎل‬ : Eleven ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ↑ ↑ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬َ‫ﻷ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ∗ ِ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﹶﺘ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ , ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺯ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﺍﻝﻔﺘﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . First part Second part Compound numbers are fixed (remain unchanged/undeclined) on fath so the first and second part like the fatha. Compound numbers are made of two parts.
  • 53.
    ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 11 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 Thenumbers from 11 to 19 ∗ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ 11 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 99  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻤ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻁﺎﻝﺒ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 11 ‫ﻭ‬ 12 The numbers 11 and 12 ∗ 11 ‫ﻭ‬ 12 : ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ‬ The enumerated, from 11 to 99 is always single, mansoob. 99 students (male) 11 students (male) If the ma’dood is masculine then the first part and the second part are masculine.
  • 54.
    ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Twelve Eleven Male studentsMale students ‫ﻓﻲ‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺩﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ 3 1 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 The numbers from 11 to 13 ∗ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ 13 ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ 19 ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﱠﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﻭل‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﻓﺎﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﱠﺎﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ِ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻠﻤﻌ‬ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Thirteen Thirteen Female students Male students Masculine Masculine If the enumerated (ma’dood) is masculine, then the first part differs in gender with the enumerated (ma’dood) and the second part agrees with the ma’dood. And the opposite is in the case of the feminine ma’dood.
  • 55.
    ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﺒ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﹶﻼ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﻁﺎ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺓ‬‫ﻋﺸﺭ‬ ‫ﺜﻼﺙ‬ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺫﻜﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ ‫ﻤﺅﻨﺙ‬ feminine masculine masculine feminine
  • 56.
    ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ . ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ .  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ِ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝﻌﺎ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻷ‬ Because  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻷ‬ = ِ ‫ل‬ +  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ . ‫ﻭ‬ )  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶﻭﺍ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻤﻥ‬ )  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ِِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺩ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻷ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . Hamid returned from school because he is poorly. Ordinal numbers Example The second lesson, to the tenth lesson. The First lesson.  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻷ‬ = laam + anna. And anna is from the sisters of inna. And they are a qualifying noun and an adjective (i.e they act as n’at and man’ut).
  • 57.
    ِ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻷ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . Ireturned from the market because I am poorly.  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ = ‫ِﻤﺎﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ . Why? ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Why?  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ Why did you exit from the school? Why did you beat this boy?
  • 58.
    ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ : ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬  ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ Why? Haa ofsilence ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫؟‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ Why? Did you beat this boy? Yes Why? ‫ﻨﻌﻡ‬ .  ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻪ‬ ‫؟‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬
  • 59.
     ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﻹﺴ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . The student is not poorly. ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ِﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺽ‬ . The student is not poorly. ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ِﺎﻝﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﺈ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ .  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ Laysa brings about negation. It makes the noun marfoo’ and makes the khabar mansoob. Verily it is majroor with baa of zaa’ida (increase) in the place of nasb. And it is made majroor (genitive) with baa of zaa’ida (increase).
  • 60.
    ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ) ‫ﺍﺒﻥ‬ ( The omitting ofhamza in ibn. ‫ﻫﻤﺯﺓ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ) ‫ﺍﺒﻥ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﹾﻅ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ٍ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Example  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . ِ ‫ل‬‫ِﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺍﻝﻬﻤﺯ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﺒ‬ ‫ِﻤﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻹ‬‫ﺍ‬ .  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻷ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ . The hamza of ibn is omitted, in writing and pronunciation, when it occurs between two names (and its condition is that the two names are on one line). Haamid son of Ali The hamza is not omitted in the example : ‘Hasan son of the imaam’, because it does not occur between two names.
  • 61.
    ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺍﺴ‬ Comparative andsuperlatives ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻫﻭ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ , ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬ ,  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ .  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻐ‬ ‫ﺼ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ,  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬‫ﺼ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ . Ismu tafdeel: it is a diptote, (prevented from changing). It is a description upon the scale of ) ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( af’alu. Haashim is tall, and Haamid is taller then him. Aamina is small, but Zaynab is smaller then her.
  • 62.
    ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬‫ﻫﻭ‬ ) ُ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ .( ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ٌ ‫ل‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻫﺫﺍ‬ , ‫ﻤﺎ‬ َ‫ل‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻁ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ َ‫ل‬ ! This man is tall, how tall is this man! ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬ , ‫ﻤﺎ‬ َ‫ل‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺠ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺓ‬ ! This car is tall, how tall is this car! ‫ِﻪ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ The Object ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : Example It is on the scale of ‘Af’alu. The verb of astonishment/amazement.
  • 63.
    ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻻﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻝﻔﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺁ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ The student read the Qur'aan ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻻﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ The laa of prohibition The laa of negation The laa of negation and the laa of prohibition  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ِﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ْ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ Why are you not eating oh my brother? ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ْ‫ل‬ ‫ﺃﺨﻲ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ . Don’t eat this oh my brother. object subject verb
  • 64.
    ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻫﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ِﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ , ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬ ,  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ِ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ . ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ِ؟‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ Are you not going to the playground? ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ . Don’t go to the playground. The difference between ‫ِﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ (laa of negation) and ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻫﻴﺔ‬ (the laa of prohibition) is that verily the laa of negation does not have an affect, as for the laa of prohibition then it makes the present verb majzoom (take a
  • 65.
    ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ( ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ The maa ofconnection ) ( : ‫ﻨﻰ‬‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﱠﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﺇ‬ ) ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺍﻝﺸﻲ‬ .( ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ . ‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺸ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺃﻱ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺫﻱ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻲ‬ . ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ْ‫ل‬ ‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺄ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ : Ponder over the following ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹾﻬﺎ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻜﺘﺎ‬ ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ . I do not have a book. ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬َ‫ﺄ‬ ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ . I will buy that which you want. ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ؟‬ what is this? It means ‘the thing which’ : ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶﺄ‬‫ﺘ‬ meaning I am eating the thing which you are
  • 66.
    ‫ِﻴل‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻻ‬ The laamof motivation/justification ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﻷ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﺝ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻐ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ َ‫ل‬  ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ Why do you say that ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ . I did not understand the lesson. ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫؟‬ ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍ‬ what is your name? Haamid left to wash his face.. I left to drink water.
  • 67.
    ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ( Making the present tense verb accusative with anna ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﻓ‬‫ُﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬َ‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ِﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ : Making nasb of ‘af’aalul khamsa ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ : ٥ ٤ ٣ ٢ ١  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ . Where do you want to go oh my brother? I want to travel to Mecca. Example You singular. Feminine are going. They dual. masculine are going. They plural. masculine are going. You plural. masculine are going. You dual. masculine are going.
  • 68.
     ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱡﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻋﻼ‬ : ‫ﹾﻫﺒﻭ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﹾﻫﺒﺎ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ . ‫ﹸﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ِ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻭﻋﻼ‬ : ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ : ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾﻫ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ That you pl. go ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ And the alif is not read. ِ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻓﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺹ‬ِ ‫ﻗ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﺘﻅ‬ ‫ﹼﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ِ ‫ﻩ‬ . ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﹶﻭ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻕ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻯ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ( ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ( That he calls The sign of its raf’ is the noon and the sign of nasb is its ommitence, and the benefit of this alif is that it manifests in the naaqis verb (a naaqis verb is one which its root ends with an alif, waw or yaa). So if it were not for this alif you would not be able to see the difference between them.
  • 69.
     ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻜﺎ‬ )  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻜﺎ‬ (  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶﺒ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺴﻡ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺨﺒ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . Hamid was rich ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺴﻡ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺨﺒ‬  ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . Hamid was studying  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . Kaana makes the noun marfoo (nominative case) and makes the khabar mansoob (accusative case) The information of kaana mansoob. The noun of kaana marfoo’ The noun of kaana, in nominative case. Kaana also brings about continuation The information of kaana in the place of nasb (accusative case).
  • 70.
    ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻜﺎ‬ ُ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ِﻴﻤ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺎ‬ . Allah is oftforgiving , merciful ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ Does not cease ) ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫َﺨﻭﺍ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ) ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ ( ,  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻤﺜﺎل‬ :  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻤ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ِﻴﻀ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ِﻲ؟‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻴﺎ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻙ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺤﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻑ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫َﺯﺍ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . How are you today oh brother? I was ill yesterday and I do not cease to be ill (meaning I still am ill). ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬  ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﻬ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ . Ahmad does not cease to be a hard worker. ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺯﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ is from the sisters of ‫ﻜﺎﻥ‬ kaana, and it brings about continuation. Example
  • 71.
    ) ‫ﻙ‬ (  ‫ﻪ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺸ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶﺤ‬‫ﻨ‬ : ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺴﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻋ‬‫ﺴﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ . My watch is like your watch.  ‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺔ‬ . This masjid is like a school. ‫ِﺭ‬ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺍﻝﻜﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ : ‫ﹶﻬﺎ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ . ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ِ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺎ‬  ‫ﻲ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ (  ‫ﻤ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ .  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹶﻥ‬‫ﻝ‬ ) ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ .  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ :  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶﺤ‬‫ﻨ‬ : The present tense verb is negated with ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ to give a future tense meaning. Lan makes the present tense verb mansoob and brings about a negation with emphasis. ‫ﻙ‬ is a preposition from the genitive prepositions, it brings about similitude. The kaaf does not enter on the pronouns. Like, : it is said: ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬َ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻪ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻬﺎ‬ . I am like him or you are like her.
  • 72.
    ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ . I willnot go to London. ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﱠﺎ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ . You will never return to the land of the disbelievers. ‫ﺴﻠﻡ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﷲ‬ ‫ﺼﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺒﻲ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ ) : ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹾﻴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺱ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬  ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﺴ‬ ِ ‫ﺓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ِ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻵ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﻪ‬ ( ‫ﺍﻝﺒﺨﺎﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺭﻭﺍﻩ‬ . ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺎ‬ َ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎﻀﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ِﻴﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﻋﻼﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﱡﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹾﻌﺎ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﹸﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ and ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ bring about negation in the past tense and they make the present tense verb jussive (take a sukoon) And the sign of the jussive case (jazm) in the af’aalul khamsa (five verbs) is the emitting of the noon and in the af’aalul ‘arb’a (four verbs) a sukoon. ‘The prophet may Allah’s peace and blessings be upon him said : He who wears silk in this life will never wear it in the hereafter’. Narrated bukhari.
  • 73.
    ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹾﻫﺒﺎ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻜﺫﻝﻙ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ .( ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ , ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ,  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻜﺫﻝﻙ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﺏ‬ ) ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ .(  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻕ‬‫ﹶﺭ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ : ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﻝ‬ =  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ , ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ =  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺍﻵ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ) ‫ﻴﻜﺘﺏ‬ ‫ﺴﻭﻑ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ .( And the difference between lam and lamma: lam yaktub = he did not write lammaa yaktub = he has not yet written (and shall write)
  • 74.
    ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ The FiveNouns ُ َ ْ َ ‫ا‬ ُ ‫ء‬ ْ !‫ا‬ ‫ﺍﺒ‬ ‫ﻗﺎل‬ ‫ﻤﺎﻝﻙ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ :  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻜﺫﻝﻙ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺃ‬ ,  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺹ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ِ ‫ﺀ‬‫ﻴﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻏ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻜﺎﻨ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ِﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺴﻤﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﱢﻡ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ . ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﺥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﺤ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ And they are: in-law mouth possess or brother father Ibn Maalik said: abun, akhun, hamun and like wise hanun, but leaving off the final on is better. (ie, Hanun) When the asmaa al khamsa are in idaafa, (other than being attached to the yaaa of mutakkalam), they decline by the addition of letters.
  • 75.
    ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ :  ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ ‫ﺃﺒ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺎ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻙ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ ِ ‫ﺕ‬‫ِﺎﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻋ‬ُ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶﺔ‬‫ﻓ‬‫ﻤﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﺃﻨ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺄ‬ You are like a father I am a father This is your father’s house. I know your father. I am your father. And if it is not in idaafa (possessor and possessed construction) then it is made to decline with its original signs.
  • 76.
    ) ‫ﻀﻰ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ( ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬ ) ‫ﻠﻰ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ٌ ‫ل‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹾﻠﻰ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﺢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺤﻰ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭﻯ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ )  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﺴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻓﺎ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ , ِ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻉ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . Akhtar is a Persian name and it is a diptote (mamnoo’ minas sarf- doesn’t like tanween and kasra). The sign of its kasra is a fatha.) Marda ‫ﻀﻰ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ is on the scale of fa’la ‫ﻠﻰ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ and it is a diptote (mamnoo’ minas sarf- doesn’t like tanween and kasra,) The sign of its kasra is a fatha.) Captive sing. Wounded pl. Wounded sing. Killed pl. Killed sing. Captives pl.
  • 77.
    ‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻐ‬ The Diminutive ) ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ( ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺍ‬ . ٍ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺯﺍ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﺜﻼﺜ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻐ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ , ‫ﻫﻲ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ : ١ ٣ ٢ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ِ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ Fu’ay’eelu Fu’ay’elu Fu’aylu ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ل‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ This is a diminutive And the diminutive has three scales, and they are: ٍ ‫ف‬ُ ْ‫أ‬ ِ َ %% ' ‫ن‬ ‫آ‬ That which is (formed from a noun) of three letters. ٍ ‫ف‬ُ ْ‫أ‬ ِ َ )َْ‫ر‬‫أ‬ ' ‫ن‬ ‫آ‬ That which is (formed from a noun) of four letters ٍ ‫ف‬ُ ْ‫أ‬ ِ َ ْ َ + ' ‫ن‬ ‫آ‬ That which is (formed from a noun) of five letters
  • 78.
     ‫ﻭ‬‫ﻨﺤ‬ : ) ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺫ‬‫ﺘﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﻴﺎ‬ ( Here it is oh teacher!  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺇ‬ ) : ‫ﻫﺎ‬ ( )  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻫ‬ ( ) ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ( ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ A small boy A boy ٌ A humble slave A slave ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺯ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻫ‬ ‫ﺯ‬ ‫ﺢ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﹾﺘﺎﺡ‬‫ﻔ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬ A small key A key ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ ‫ِﻕ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻓ‬ A small hotel A hotel ‫ﻜﺘﺎﺏ‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ A small book A book (note book) ‫ﹶﺒﺭ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ Information The preposition of alarming or making aware. Beginning  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻋ‬ A small flower A flower
  • 79.
    ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻴﻘﻭل‬ : ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬‫ﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺓ‬‫ﺃ‬‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ : ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ . ) ‫ﺱ‬ِ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺸﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ( Sit wherever you wish ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ( ِ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ٍ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻤﻜﺎ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻅ‬ , ِ ‫ﻪ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻘﺎ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ) ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ , ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ )  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺸﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ ( ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬‫ﺇ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﱢ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ . The man says: ‫ﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬ (here I am) and the woman says: ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﺃﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻫﺎ‬(here I am). ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ is an adverb of place and it is attached to a sentence. And it is said its ‘iraab (declension) ,‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ is fixed on damma in the place of nasb (accusative case) maf’oolun feehi and the sentence  ‫ﺀ‬‫ﹶﺸﺎ‬‫ﺘ‬ is in the place of jar, mudaafun ilayhee.
  • 80.
    ) ِ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﺩ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( By Allah I was about to die! ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ِﺎﻝﻼ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﻩ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬  ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹶﺴ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ِﻠ‬ ‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻭﺍﺒ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﻌ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ‬ . ‫ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺯﻴل‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ) ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺯ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﱢ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ..........  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹾﺴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( By the fig and the olive…. Verily, We created man of the best stature (mould), (At-Tin 95:4) ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻡ‬‫ِﺎﻝﻼ‬ ‫ﺒ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻜ‬َ‫ﺅ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻓﻼ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ِﻌ‬ ‫ﻔ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ . ُ ‫ل‬‫ﺘﻘﻭ‬ ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ .( When the past tense verb occurs as an affirmation with an oath, it is necessary to emphasis it with a laam and qad. As for the past tense verb which comes as an negation with an oath then it is not emphasised with laam and qad. You say  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺭ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﷲ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‘by Allah I did not see him’
  • 81.
    ) ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ( ) ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ (  ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ِﻲ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺹ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ) ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ِ ‫ل‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺒﺎﻝ‬ ,  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﻭﻝ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ) ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ ( ‫ﹶﻁﺄ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻤﺎﻀﻲ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ) . ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ ( ِ ‫ل‬‫ﺤ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﻡ‬ ‫ﻀ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬  ‫ﻲ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻓ‬ ٌ ‫ل‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ٍ ‫ﺏ‬‫ﺼ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ . ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ When ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﺤ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻤ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺸ‬ ‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻠ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺨ‬ ‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ When I entered the house I smelt a pleasant smell. ‫ﻫﺫﻩ‬ ) ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ( ‫ﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺠ‬  ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺎﻀﻲ‬  ‫ﺹ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺨ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹲ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻅ‬ ‫ﻫﻲ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻜﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺎ‬‫ﻤﺎﻀﻴ‬ . ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ is specific for the past tense and ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ for the future. People use ‫ﹰ‬ ‫ﺍ‬‫ﺩ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺃ‬ with the past tense however this is incorrect. ‫ﱡ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻗ‬ is fixed on the damma in the place of the nasb case, maf’oolun feehi. This is called the lammaa of heeniyyah (lamma of time). It is an adverb (of time) and is specific to the past tense (verb). Its answer is always in the past tense like what is in the example.
  • 82.
     ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻻ‬ ِ ‫ﻉ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻀﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ‬َ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺨ‬‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﺢ‬ِ ‫ﺼ‬ , ‫ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺱ‬ ِ ‫ل‬‫ﹶﻭ‬‫ﻗ‬‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ ) ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹼﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ (  ‫ﺏ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ :  ‫ﺽ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﹼﻌﺎ‬ ‫ﻁ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻫﺫﺍ‬ ُ ‫ل‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻋ‬ . ‫ﱠﻰ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺜ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻤﻴ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ : The dual pronoun ) ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻫ‬ ( ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ِ ‫ﺌ‬‫ﻝﻠﻐﺎ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺙ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺄ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﺭ‬‫ِﻴ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﱠﺫ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻓﻴ‬ ‫ِﻱ‬ ‫ﻭ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﺴ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ , ‫ﹶﻴ‬‫ﺘ‬‫ﻝﻠﻐﺎﺌﺒ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬ , ‫ﻭ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝﻠ‬ , ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹶﻴ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻁ‬‫ﺨﺎ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﻝﻠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ . The dual pronoun includes the masculine and feminine. It is used for the dual masculine and feminine third person and dual feminine and masculine second person. It is not correct that it enters upon the present tense (verb), like the speech of people ‘Lamma (when) I eat this food I become ill’ and the correct is: ‘ indamaa (when) I eat this food I become ill.’
  • 83.
    ‫ِل‬ ‫ﺼ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﻀ‬ : Theattached nominative pronoun.  ‫ﻭ‬‫ﺤ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬ِ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﺍﻷ‬ : ‫ﺫﻫﺒ‬  ‫ﺩ‬‫ﺨﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺤﺎﻤﺩ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ , ‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻫ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺫ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺁ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﻁﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺎ‬ . Haamid and khaalid went, faatima and Aamina went. ‫ﻤ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹾﺴﺎ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬  ‫ﺱ‬‫ﻴ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻝ‬ ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ِ ‫ﻅ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻔ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻠ‬ِ ‫ﺒ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻪ‬ ِ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﹾﻨﺎ‬‫ﺜ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ َ‫ل‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻥ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺠﺎﺯ‬ ‫ِﺩ‬ ‫ﺤ‬‫ﻭﺍ‬ ‫ﹼ‬ ‫ﻻ‬‫ﺇ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﻨ‬ ِ ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ , ‫ﻨﺤﻭ‬ : ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ِﻼ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻏ‬‫ﺍ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ , ‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻝ‬‫ﹶﻭ‬‫ﻗ‬  ‫ﻪ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ِ ‫ﻤ‬  ‫ﻭ‬ ) : ‫ﺩ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻘ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻓ‬ ‫ﹾ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﻐ‬ ‫ﺼ‬  ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹸﻭ‬ ‫ﻠ‬‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻗ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ .( Alif It is permissible to use the plural wording of things which are connected to a person, and can only be found in the singular forms, when addressing two people. Example: ‫ﻤﺎ‬ ُ ‫ﺅ‬‫ﻤﺎ‬‫ﺴ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ؟‬ ‫ﻜ‬ What are your(two people) names? , ‫ِﻼ‬ ‫ﺴ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻏ‬‫ﺍ‬  ‫ﻫ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺠ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﹸﻤﺎ‬ ‫ﻜ‬ wash your (two people) faces, and from it, is his speech the most high: ‘..so indeed your hearts inclined…’ (At-tahreem 66:04)
  • 84.
    ٍ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺃ‬ ِ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻌ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﺭ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ‬‫ﹶ‬‫ﺕ‬‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﻌ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬ ‫ﻤ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﺕ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬  ‫ﻊ‬ ‫ﺒ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ . ‫ﻫﻲ‬ : The adjective follows the qualifying noun (that which is described) in 4 matters. They are: ‫ﹸ‬ ‫ﻑ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻌ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺭ‬‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﺭﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻓ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ﺔ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ِ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺜ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ , ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻊ‬‫ﻤ‬ ‫ﺠ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ِﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﻜ‬‫ﹾ‬‫ﺫ‬‫ﺍﻝﺘ‬ ‫ﻭ‬ ‫ِﻴﺙ‬ ‫ﻨ‬‫ﱠﺄ‬ ‫ﺘ‬‫ﺍﻝ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﺏ‬‫ﻋ‬‫ﺍﻹ‬ In masculinity and femininity In definiteness and indefiniteness In singularity, duality and plurality In declension ٢ ٤ ٣ ١
  • 85.
    ‫ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﷲ‬ ‫ﻜﻠﻪ‬‫ﺍﻝﺤﻤﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺘ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﺒﺭ‬ ‫ﻁﻠﺤﺔ‬ ‫ﺴﻠﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺃﺒﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﷲ‬ ‫ﺇﻝﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻝﻔﻘﻴﺭ‬ ‫ﻜﺘﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﻴ‬ ‫ﻁﺎﻨﻲ‬ . ‫ﻤﺠﺎﻫﺩ‬  ‫ﻡ‬‫ﺃ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺨﺕ‬ ‫ﺘﺭﺠﻤﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻭ‬